ADTRAN MX2800 M13 User manual

Add to My manuals
198 Pages

advertisement

ADTRAN MX2800 M13 User manual | Manualzz

®

MX2800

M13 Multiplexer

User Manual

Document Number: 61200290L1-1H

April 2012

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Front Matter

Trademarks

Any brand names and product names included in this manual are trademarks, registered trademarks, or trade names of their respective holders.

OpenView ™ is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

Spectrum ® is a registered trademark of Cabletron.

ADVISION ™ is a trademark of ADTRAN.

Total Access Element Management System ™ is a trademark of ADTRAN.

To the Holder of the Manual

The contents of this publication are current as of the date of publication. ADTRAN ® the right to change the contents without prior notice.

reserves

In no event will ADTRAN be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages or for commercial losses even if ADTRAN has been advised thereof as a result of issue of this publication.

ii

®

901 Explorer Boulevard

P.O. Box 140000

Huntsville, AL 35814-4000

(256) 963-8000

©2012 ADTRAN, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

61200290L1-1H

Revision History

Revision

G

H

Date

October 2004

April 2012

Description

This revision of the MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual has been updated to include new features for the System Control Unit (P/N

1185002L2).

This revision incorporates the E1 part numbers. For more information, refer to

“RoHS Compliant” on page vi.

Conventions

The following typographical conventions are used in this document:

This font indicates a cross-reference link.

This font indicates screen menus, fields, and parameters.

T HIS FONT

indicates keyboard keys ( E NTER

, E SC

, A LT

). Keys that are to be pressed simultaneously are shown with a plus sign ( A LT + X indicates that the A LT key and

X key should be pressed at the same time ).

This font indicates references to other documentation and is also used for emphasis.

This font indicates on-screen messages and prompts.

This font

indicates text to be typed exactly as shown.

This font indicates silk-screen labels or other system label items.

This font is used for strong emphasis.

NOTE

Notes inform the user of additional, but essential, information or features.

CAUTION

Cautions inform the user of potential damage, malfunction, or disruption to equipment, software, or environment.

WARNING

Warnings inform the user of potential bodily pain, injury, or death.

61200290L1-1H iii

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio frequencies. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

NOTE

Shielded cables must be used with this unit to ensure compliance with Class A FCC limits.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Canadian Emissions Requirements

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital

Apparatus,” ICES-003 of the Department of Communications.

Cet appareil nuerique respecte les limites de bruits radioelectriques applicables aux appareils numeriques de Class A prescrites dans la norme sur le materiel brouilleur: “Appareils Numeriques,” NMB-003 edictee par le ministre des Communications.

Canadian Equipment Limitations

Notice: The Canadian Industry and Science Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.

Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above limitations may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this iv 61200290L1-1H

equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.

Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.

CAUTION

Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contract the appropriate electric inspection authority or an electrician, as appropriate.

The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device, to prevent overloading.

The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all devices does not exceed 100.

Training

ADTRAN offers training courses on our products. These courses include overviews on product features and functions while covering applications of ADTRAN product lines. ADTRAN provides a variety of training options, including customized training and courses taught at our facilities or at customer sites.

For inquiries concerning training, contact ADTRAN:

Training Phone: 800-615-1176

Training Fax:

Training Email:

256-963-6217 [email protected]

61200290L1-1H v

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

RoHS Compliant

This issue of this document includes RoHS compliant products. The products listed in the following table meet the EU's RoHS Directive 2002/95/EC and/or applicable exemptions. See www.adtran.com

for further information on RoHS/WEEE.

ADTRAN Non-RoHS

Compliant

4205290L1

4205290L2

4205290L3

4205290L4

4205290L5

4205290L6

4205290L7

4205290L8

1205288L1

1205288L2

1200291L1

1200291L2

4175043L2

1200657L2

1200287L1

1200287L5

1200287L7

1200291L5

1200466L1

ADTRAN RoHS

Compliant

4205290E7

4205290E8

1205288E2

1200291E1

1200287E1

1200291E5

Description

AC Non-Redundant Version with Modem

AC Redundant Version with Modem

DC Non-Redundant Version with Modem

DC Redundant Version with Modem

AC Non-Redundant Version

AC Redundant Version

DC Non-Redundant Version

DC Redundant Version

Controller Card

Controller Card

Breakout Panel

Breakout Panel

Battery Backup

Battery Backup Adapter Cable

Amp to Punch-Down Cable 25 ft.

Amp to Punch-Down Cable 50 ft.

Amp to Punch-Down Cable 100 ft.

BNC patch panel

Fan Faceplate vi 61200290L1-1H

Contents

Section 1

Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Controller Card 1:1 Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

T3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Network Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

TL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Available Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Breakout Panel (P/N 1200291L1 and P/N 1200291E1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

E1 Patch Panel (P/N 1200291L5 and P/N 1200291E5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Battery Backup (P/N 4175043L2 and P/N 4175043G2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Fan Faceplate (P/N 1200466L1 and P/N 1200466G1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Section 2

Installation and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Receiving Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

ADTRAN Shipping Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Rackmount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Connecting the Breakout Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Connecting the E1 Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

LAN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Modem Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Noncritical and Critical Alarm Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

DSX-3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

DSX-1/E1 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

61200290L1-1H vii

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Craft Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Establishing Terminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Navigating Within the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Telnet Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Privilege Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

ACO Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

LED Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Power Supply A/B Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Controller Cards Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

T1/E1 Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Replacing or Installing Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Section 3

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

DS3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Line Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Remote Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

XCV Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Protection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Active Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Network Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Maximum Switch Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Min. Switching Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Loopback Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Shutdown Stand-By . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

DS2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

T1/E1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

T1/E1 State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Set Multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

T1/E1 Line Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

T1/E1 Line Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

T1/E1 Loopback Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

T1/E1 Circuit Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

T1/E1 Line Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

XCV Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

viii 61200290L1-1H

Contents

System Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Management Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Local IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Gateway IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Modem Remote IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Management Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Forward IP to Remote DS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

DS3 Remote IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

DS3 IP MTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Dialup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Primary and Secondary Phone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Initializing String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Dial String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Maximum Redial Attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Idle Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Connection Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Pause Between Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Dialout On Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Answer on Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Modem Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Modem Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Hangup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Last Modem Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

SNMP Management Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

SNMP State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Trap IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Trap Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Read Community Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Write Community Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Trap Community Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

System Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Network Date/Time Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Server IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Refresh Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

DST Automatic Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Local Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

System Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

User Account Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Guest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

RADIUS Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

RADIUS State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Server IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

61200290L1-1H ix

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

UDP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Privilege Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Shared Secret Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Shared Secret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Response Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Maximum Retries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Terminal Time Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

IP Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

IP Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Alarm Relay Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Equipment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Unit ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Facility ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Location ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Frame ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Unit Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Equipment Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Syslog Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Host IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Severity Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Host Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Auto Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Craft Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Loading Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Load Default Settings Other Than System Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Load System Management Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Load All Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Updating Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Update Via XModem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Update Via TFTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Configuration Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Saving to a TFTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Retrieving from a TFTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

Resetting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

Save Configuration and Alarm Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Section 4

Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

DS3 State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Rx Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

x 61200290L1-1H

Contents

Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Power Supply State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Card A/Card B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Card Comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

DS2 State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

T1/E1 State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Acknowledge Alarms (ACO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Section 5

Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Viewing Statistical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

DS3 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

24 Hour Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Performance Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Interval starting at: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Unavailable Seconds (UAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Line Coding Violation (LCV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Line Errored Seconds (LES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

P-Bit Errored Seconds (PES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

P-Bit Severely Errored Seconds (PSES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

P-Bit Coding Violations (PCV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

C-Bit Code Violations (CCV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

C-Bit Errored Seconds (CES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

C-Bit Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

F-Bit Errors (FBE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Far End Block Error (FEBE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Clear All Local DS3 Statistics/Refresh All Remote Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

DS2 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

24-Hour Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Performance Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

T1/E1 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Protection Switch Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Performance Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Alarm Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Section 6

Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

T1/E1 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

61200290L1-1H xi

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Data Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Analog Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Digital Line/Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Codec Line/Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Remote Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

CSU Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

CSU Loopback w/BERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Line BERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

DS3 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Line Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Digital Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Metallic Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Remote Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Remote All T1/E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

DS2 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

DS2 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Section 7

Circuit and Network Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Nonredundant Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Circuit Failure Recovery Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Circuit and Network Failure Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Section 8

Power Loss Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Nonredundant Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Power Supply Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Power Supply and Source Recovery Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Battery Backup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Section 9

Transaction Language 1 (TL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

TL1 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

TL1 Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Acknowledgment Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

In Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

All Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Output Response Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Autonomous Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

xii 61200290L1-1H

Contents

TL1 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

TL1 Autonomous Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

TL1 Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

TL1 Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

TL1 Editing Examples: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

TL1 RTRV examples: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Data Dictionaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

TL1 Loopback Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Appendix A

Acceptance Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Verifying the Installed Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Configuring the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

Accessing the Craft Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

Provisioning the DS3 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

DS3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

Protection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

DS2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

Provisioning the DS1 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

Alarm Relay Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

Verifying the Data Integrity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

DS1 Daisy-Chain to DS3 (Hard) Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

DS1 to DS3 Head-to-Head Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6

DS1 to DS3 (Hard) Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

Verifying Alarm Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

Critical Alarm Relay Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

Noncritical Alarm Relay Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

Verifying System Redundancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

Power Supply Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

Single Power Supply Module / Dual Power Feeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9

Dual Power Supply Modules / Dual Power Feeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9

Controller Card Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10

Restoring Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11

Configuring the System for Traffic Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11

Signing-off the MX2800 ATP Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12

Appendix B

Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

61200290L1-1H xiii

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Appendix C

Specifications Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Specifications and Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

DSX-3 Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

DSX-1 Interface(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

DS3 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

DS2 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

DSX-1 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

VT100 Terminal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

Integrated Modem Interface (4200290L1, 4200290L2, 4200290L3, 4200290L4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

SNMP/Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

Agency Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

Physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

Appendix D

Acronyms/Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Appendix E

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

Appendix F

Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

Warranty and Customer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

ADTRAN Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

ADTRAN Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

ADTRAN Repair/CAPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

Repair and Return Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

xiv 61200290L1-1H

Figures

Figures

Figure 1-1.

E1 Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Figure 1-2.

Installing Fan Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Figure 2-1.

DC Power Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Figure 2-2.

The Breakout Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Figure 2-3.

MX2800 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Figure 2-4.

MX2800 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Figure 2-5.

Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Figure 2-6.

Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Figure 2-7.

Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Figure 2-8.

Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Figure 2-9.

Loopback Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Figure 2-10. Telnet Client Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Figure 2-11. Replacing or Installing Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Figure 3-1.

Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Figure 3-2.

Configuration Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Figure 3-3.

Network Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Figure 3-4.

T1/E1 Interface Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Figure 3-5.

T1/E1 State Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Figure 3-6.

Set Multiple Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Figure 3-7.

T1/E1 Line Coding Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Figure 3-8.

T1/E1 Line Length Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Figure 3-9.

Loopback Detection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Figure 3-10. Circuit Protection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Figure 3-11. Line Identification Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Figure 3-12. System Management Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Figure 3-13. Dialup Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Figure 3-14. Trap Generation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Figure 3-15. Alarm Relay Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Figure 3-16. Equipment Identification Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Figure 3-17. System Utilities Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Figure 3-18. Indication of a Saved Configuration and Alarm Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Figure 4-1.

Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Figure 5-1.

Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Figure 5-2.

DS3 Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Figure 5-3.

DS3 Current 15 Minute Alarm Count Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Figure 5-4.

DS3 24-Hour Alarm History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Figure 5-5.

DS3 Performance Parameters (Current 15 Minutes) - Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Figure 5-6.

DS3 Performance Parameters (Current 15 Minutes) - Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Figure 5-7.

DS3 Performance Parameters (24 Hour History) - Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Figure 5-8.

DS3 Performance Parameters (24 Hour History) - Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Figure 5-9.

DS3 Performance Parameters (Totals) - Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Figure 5-10. DS3 Performance Parameters (Totals) - Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Figure 5-11. DS2 Current 15 Minute Alarm Count Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Figure 5-12. DS2 RAI 24-Hour Alarm History - Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Figure 5-13. DS2 RAI 24-Hour Alarm History - Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

61200290L1-1H xv

MX2800M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Figure 5-14. DS2 Performance Parameters (Current 15 Minutes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Figure 5-15. DS2 PBERR 24-Hour Alarm History - Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Figure 5-16. DS2 PBERR 24-Hour Alarm History - Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Figure 5-17. T1/E1 Port Local Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Figure 5-18. Protection Switch Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Figure 5-19. Alarm Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Figure 6-1.

Loopback Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Figure 6-2.

Loopback Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Figure 6-3.

Tributary Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Figure 6-4.

Analog Network Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Figure 6-5.

Digital Line/Network Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Figure 6-6.

Codec Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Figure 6-7.

Loopback Menu with BERT Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Figure 6-8.

DS3 Loopback Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Figure 6-9.

Line Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Figure 6-10. Digital Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Figure 6-11. Metallic Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Figure 6-12. DS2 Loopback Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Figure 6-13. DS2 Network Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Figure 7-1.

Nonredundant Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Figure 7-2.

Circuit Failure Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Figure 7-3.

Circuit and Network Failure Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Figure 8-1.

Nonredundant Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Figure 8-2.

Power Supply Failure Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Figure 8-3.

Power Supply and Source Failure Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Figure 8-4.

Battery Backup System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

xvi 61200290L1-1H

Tables

Tables

61200290L1-1H xvii

MX2800M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Table 4-8.

Table 4-9.

Table 5-1.

Table 7-1.

Table 9-1.

Table 9-2.

Table 9-3.

Table 9-4.

Table 9-5.

Table 9-6.

Table 9-7.

Table 2-1.

Table 2-2.

Table 2-3.

Table 2-4.

Table 2-5.

Table 2-6.

Table 3-1.

Table 3-2.

Table 3-3.

Table 3-4.

Table 3-5.

Table 3-6.

Table 3-7.

Table 4-1.

Table 4-2.

Table 4-3.

Table 4-4.

Table 4-5.

Table 4-6.

Table 4-7.

This page is intentionally blank.

DC Connector Symbol Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

MX2800 Review View Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Navigation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

LED Conditions for Active Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

LED Conditions for Standby Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

T1/E1 LED Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

XCV Threshold Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

XCV Threshold Limits for T1/E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Trap Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Console Menu User Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Types of Alarms in Alarm Relay Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Syslog Severity Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Self-Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Network State Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Alarm Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Remote Alarm Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Power Supply Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

System State Alarm Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Controller Card States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Protection Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

DS2 States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

T1/E1 States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Alarm Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Configuration Requirements for Circuit Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

TL1 Account Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

TL1 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

MX2800 Alarm Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

MX2800 Informational Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

TL1 Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

xviii 61200290L1-1H

Tables

Table 9-8.

Table 9-9.

TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for EQPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Table 9-10.

DS3 TL1 Loopback Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Table 9-11.

DS2 TL1 Loopback Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Table 9-12.

DS1 TL1 Loopback Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Table A-1.

Module Install Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2

Table A-2.

MX2800 ATP Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-12

Table B-1.

Craft Port Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

Table B-2.

LAN Port Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2

Table B-3.

Modem Port Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2

Table B-4.

Amphenol Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2

61200290L1-1H xix

MX2800M13 Multiplexer User Manual xx 61200290L1-1H

Section 1

Product Overview

INTRODUCTION

The MX2800 is an M13 multiplexer that consolidates T1 and E1 signals into a T3 circuit. This unit provides a cost-effective, versatile tool for combining independent T1s, E1s, or a combination of the two over the same T3 circuit.

The MX2800 houses two hot-swappable controller cards which provide 1:1 redundancy for the

T1 and T3 signals, as well as the T3 connections.

Embedded simple network management protocol (SNMP) and Telnet are available through the modem port using serial line internet protocol/point-to-point protocol (SLIP/PPP) or through the 10Base-T Ethernet port. Using the Management Information Base II (MIB II), RFC 1407 standards, and an ADTRAN enterprise MIB, the MX2800 can be configured, monitored, and diagnosed with standard SNMP network management programs such as Hewlett Packard’s HP

OpenView ™ and Cabletron’s Spectrum ® . In addition, the SysLog Host Daemon allows remote monitoring, collecting, and logging of MX2800 events in real-time. This information is useful during installation setups and/or troubleshooting.

Complete configuration, loopbacks, and performance monitoring are available through SNMP,

Telnet, or a VT100 terminal interface. This connection can be made via Ethernet, a local EIA-

232 link, or through the built-in V.34 modem. The modem can dial out a “cry for help” for units located in unmanned facilities. The MX2800 is designed for installation in a 19-inch or

23-inch rack.

The major features of the MX2800 are as follows:

• Built-in 1:1 redundancy

• Hot-swappable controller cards

• Independent, dual-load sharing, redundant power supplies

• Embedded SNMP and Telnet management through 10Base-T Ethernet or SLIP/PPP dialup

• Detailed performance monitoring for local and remote units

• Simplified configuration through the VT100 terminal menu structure

• Integrated V.34 modem for dial-up and dial-down access

• Capability of backhauling multiple service types (T1/E1)

• AC or DC power

• Available –48V or 24V power supplies

• External DS3 clock option

61200290L1-1H 1-1

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

• M13 and C-bit signaling support

• NEBS Level 3 compliant

NOTE

Information regarding the built-in modem applies to the part numbers 4202290L1, 4202290L2, 4202290L3, and 4202290L4.

CONTROLLER CARD 1:1 REDUNDANCY

The MX2800 supports two hot-swappable controller cards which provide 1:1 redundancy for the T1 and T3 signals and connections. With two cards installed, the MX2800 can recover

from circuit or network failure. Refer to “Section 7, Circuit and Network Redundancy”

for more information.

T3 OVERVIEW

A T3 provides the same bandwidth as 28 T1s. Typically, leasing a T3 line costs the same as eight to ten T1s. Using the MX2800, a single T3 can provide internet connectivity and voice

(local and long distance) to individual sites across up to 28 individual DSX-1s. T3 is also extremely cost effective for backhauling local and long distance voice.

SNMP

The MX2800’s embedded SNMP feature allows the unit to be accessed and controlled by a network manager through the 10Base-T local area network (LAN) port. The MX2800 supports the MIB-II standard, RFC 1213, and the ADTRAN Enterprise Specific MIB.

NOTE

MIB files are available from ADTRAN in the support section of the

ADTRAN Web page at www.adtran.com

.

The term SNMP broadly refers to the message protocols used to exchange information between the network management system (NMS) and the managed devices, as well as to the structure of device management databases. SNMP has three basic components: the network manager, the agent, and the MIB.

Network Manager

The network manager is a set of control programs that collect, control, and present data pertinent to the operation of the network devices. These programs reside on a network management station.

1-2 61200290L1-1H

Section 1, Product Overview - Telnet

Agent

The agent is a control program that resides in every network device. This program responds to queries and commands from the network manager, returns requested information or invokes configuration changes initiated by the manager, and sends unsolicited traps to the manager.

MIB

An MIB is an industry standard presentation of all status and configuration parameters supported by a network device.

TELNET

Telnet provides a password protected, remote login facility to the MX2800 that allows a remote user to control the MX2800 through the terminal menus. Only one Telnet menu session may be active at a time.

TL1

Transaction Language 1 (TL1) is an ASCII-based language that supports both commandresponse and autonomous (NE) message generation. Commonly, TL1 is used over an X.25 packet network but is completely independent of any physical layer protocols. For the

MX2800, TL1 is implemented as a Telnet session running over Ethernet or PPP. Currently, up to eight TL1 Telnet connections can be active at a time.

AVAILABLE OPTIONS

The following optional equipment is available for use with the MX2800. Contact a local distributor or the ADTRAN Sales Department for more information. Refer to

“Appendix F,

Warranty”

for contact information.

Breakout Panel (P/N 1200291L1 and P/N 1200291E1)

The optional breakout panel connects to the MX2800 and provides 28 RJ connectors for the individual T1s/E1s. Shipment includes two six-foot, 64-pin to 64-pin amphenol cables which allow direct cabling to the MX2800. Refer to

“Connecting the Breakout Panel” on page 2-5 for

more information.

E1 Patch Panel (P/N 1200291L5 and P/N 1200291E5)

The optional E1 patch panel connects to the MX2800 and provides 28 pairs of BNC

connectors for E1 deployment (21 of which are used for E1 deployment). See Figure 1-1 on page 1-4 .

61200290L1-1H 1-3

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

TX

ON

OPEN

CH 1

EARTH

ON

ON

OPEN

CH 2

EARTH

ON

OPEN

CH 3

EARTH

ON

OPEN

CH 5

EARTH

ON

ON

ON

OPEN

CH 4

EARTH

RX

ON

ON

ON

TX

ON

OPEN

CH 6

EARTH

ON

ON

OPEN

CH 7

EARTH

ON

OPEN

CH 8

EARTH

ON

ON

OPEN

CH 10

EARTH

ON

ON

OPEN

CH 9

EARTH

RX

ON

ON

ON

TX

ON

OPEN

CH 11

EARTH

RX

ON

ON

OPEN

CH 12

EARTH

ON

ON

OPEN

CH 13

EARTH

ON

OPEN

CH 15

EARTH

ON

ON

ON

OPEN

CH 14

EARTH

ON

ON

TX

ON

OPEN

CH 16

EARTH

RX

ON

ON

OPEN

CH 17

EARTH

ON

ON

OPEN

CH 18

EARTH

ON

OPEN

CH 20

EARTH

ON

ON

ON

OPEN

CH 19

EARTH

ON

ON

Figure 1-1. E1 Patch Panel

TX

ON

OPEN

CH 21

EARTH

ON

ON

OPEN

CH 22

EARTH

ON

OPEN

CH 23

EARTH

ON

ON

OPEN

CH 25

EARTH

ON

ON

OPEN

CH 24

EARTH

RX

ON

ON

ON

TX

ON

OPEN

CH 26

EARTH

ON

RX

ON

OPEN

CH 27

EARTH

ON

ON

OPEN

CH 28

EARTH

ON

Shipment includes two six-foot, 64-pin to 64-pin amphenol cables for direct cabling to the

MX2800. Refer to “Connecting the E1 Patch Panel” on page 2-5 or more information.

Battery Backup (P/N 4175043L2 and P/N 4175043G2)

The battery backup system provides power backup in the event of power loss. This system includes the battery, an AC battery charger, and an alarm cable.

Fan Faceplate (P/N 1200466L1 and P/N 1200466G1)

The MX2800 fan faceplate provides the means for additional heat dissipation, allowing multiple units to be stacked directly over each other. The fan faceplate replaces the original

faceplate. It is used with the 1202289L1, 1202289L2, and 1202289L3 power supplies. Figure

1-2 shows how the fan faceplate is installed on the chassis.

1-4

Figure 1-2. Installing Fan Faceplate

61200290L1-1H

Section 2

Installation and Operation

INTRODUCTION

The first three tasks for installing and operating the MX2800 are to unpack, inspect, and power up. The next three subsections detail the tasks. Additional subsections provide information for mounting the MX2800 into an equipment rack, making the proper connection to the back panel, identifying the front panel indicators and modular jack, and outlining the addition or removal of a card.

RECEIVING INSPECTION

Carefully inspect the MX2800 for any damage that might have occurred in shipment. If damage is suspected, file a claim immediately with the carrier, keep the original packaging for damage verification and/or returning the unit, and contact ADTRAN Customer Service. For

warranty information, refer to “Appendix F, Warranty” .

ADTRAN SHIPPING CONTENTS

After unpacking the MX2800 unit but before an initial power up, be sure that the following items are present:

• MX2800 unit

• DC or AC power supply (Two power supplies come with the Redundant versions.)

• Controller card (Two cards come with the Redundant versions.)

• 8-pin to 6-pin modular cable (modem version only)

• 8-pin to 8-pin modular cable

• 8-pin modular to DB-9 female connector

• Two 4-position terminal lug connectors

• 3-position terminal lug connector

• Six-foot AC power cable (AC version only)

• Mounting ears and screws for 19-inch or 23-inch rack installation

• User manual or CD containing the User Manual

61200290L1-1H 2-1

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

NOTE

MIB files are available from ADTRAN in the support section of the

ADTRAN Web page at www.adtran.com

.

POWER UP

The AC version of the MX2800 is provided with a 6-foot power cable terminated in a threeprong plug which is connected to a grounded 120 VAC power receptacle.

NOTE

Power to the AC version of the MX2800 must be provided from a grounded 120 VAC power receptacle.

The DC version of the MX2800 is provided with two 4-position modular terminal lug connectors. These connectors simplify the initial wiring and connection or disconnection of the DC power when replacing rackmount units.

NOTE

A 3-amp fuse is recommended for use in the fuse and alarm panel that feeds the MX2800.

For more detailed information on power connections, refer to

“Section 8, Power Loss

Recovery”

.

Once the modular connector is wired, push it firmly into one of the rear panel power connectors.

Figure 2-1 on page 2-3 and Table 2-1 on page 2-3 illustrate the DC power

connector and give definitions for the four connector symbols.

NOTE

The chassis should be connected to an earth ground using the ground stud located between the AC and DC power sources on the rear panel.

2-2 61200290L1-1H

DSX-1/E1

(OUT)

DSX-1/E1

(IN)

Section 2, Installation and Operation - Power Up

DC POWER

PWR

FAIL

+

B

-48V 0.7A

+24V 1.5A

PWR

FAIL

+

A

T R

CLK

A

S T R

CLK

B

S

115 AC 50/60Hz

0.8A

L

A

N

M

O

D

E

M

NONCRITICAL

NO COM NC

CRITICAL

OUT

DS3/STS-1

IN

A

B

PWR

FAIL

+

-48V 0.7A

+24V 1.5A

Figure 2-1. DC Power Connector

Symbol

PWR FAIL

RET

Table 2-1. DC Connector Symbol Definitions

Definition

Battery backup connector. If the AC fails, a trap is sent to alert user when connected to the battery backup (P/N 4175043L2 or P/N 4175043G2) or equivalent system.

Negative side of DC power source (usually –48 VDC)

Positive side of DC power source (usually ground)

Frame Ground

The following UL requirements must be met during installation of the MX2800 DC version:

1. Disconnect all power sources prior to servicing. Unit may use multiple power sources.

2. Input: Minimum 48 VDC, 0.8 amps

3. Input: Minimum 120 VAC, 0.32 amps

4. Connect to a reliably grounded –48 VDC source which is electrically isolated from the AC source. Use 24 VDC source for 1202289L3.

5. The branch circuit overcurrent protection must be a fuse or circuit breaker rated minimum 48 VDC, maximum 20 amps.

6. A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably approved and rated must be incorporated in the field wiring.

7. The chassis should be connected to an earth ground using the ground stud located between the AC and DC power sources on the rear panel.

61200290L1-1H 2-3

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

8. The unit must be installed in accordance with the requirements of NEC NFPA 70.

9. The unit must be installed in accordance with Articles 400 and 364.8 of the National

Electrical Code NFPA 70 when installed outside of a Restricted Access Location (i.e.,

Central Office, behind a locked door, service personnel area only).

10. Care should be taken not to upset the stability of the equipment rack after installation is complete.

CAUTION

Use copper conductors only for DC power and ground connection.

RACKMOUNT INSTALLATION

The MX2800 can be mounted into a standard 19-inch or 23-inch equipment rack. Follow these steps to mount the unit into a rack:

1. Install the mounting flanges on each side of the MX2800 at one of the three available positions.

CAUTION

Be sure to install the flanges with the screws provided.

2. After the flanges have been installed, position the MX2800 at the correct location within the rack and secure the mounting flanges to the mounting rails of the rack.

3. Make all network, DTE, and power connections to the rear of the unit. Refer to “Power Up” on page 2-2 for more information on making the DC power connection.

4. Using the 8-position modular to DB-9 female connector and the 8-pin to 8-pin modular cable, connect a VT100 terminal device to the CRAFT port on the front panel of the unit.

NOTE

Two MX2800s can be stacked with out any spacing between the units. ADTRAN recommends 1U (1.75”) of separation above and below the two stacked units. This spacing allows the units to dissipate heat. The design of the MX2800 uses the chassis to distribute heat generated by the unit’s internal cards. This design allows the units to operate without a cooling fan, thus increasing overall reliability of the units.

2-4 61200290L1-1H

Section 2, Installation and Operation - Rackmount Installation

Connecting the Breakout Panel

The optional breakout panel (P/N 1200291L1 and P/N 1200291E1) connects to the MX2800 via the IN and OUT amphenol connectors located on the back of the unit and provides 28 RJ connectors for the individual T1s/E1s. Shipment includes two six-foot, 64-pin to 64-pin amphenol cables for direct cabling to the MX2800. Connect the breakout panel’s IN amphenol connector to the MX2800’s IN amphenol connector and the breakout panel’s OUT amphenol connector to the MX2800’s OUT

amphenol connector. See Figure 2-2 .

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27

A

C

T

N

E

T

A

L

M

P

R

F

FRONT VIEW

L

A

N

M

O

D

E

M

NONCRITICAL

NO COM NC

CRITICAL

OUT

DS3/STS-1

NET

A

IN

B

OUT IN

DSX-1/E1

(OUT)

Cable 2

Cable 1

DSX-1/E1

(IN)

REAR VIEW

Figure 2-2. The Breakout Panel

DC POWER

PWR

FAIL

+

B

-48V 0.7A

+24V 1.5A

PWR

FAIL

A

+

T R

CLK

A

S T R

CLK

B

S

115 AC 50/60Hz

0.8A

Connecting the E1 Patch Panel

The optional E1 patch panel (P/N 1200291L5 and P/N 1200291E5) connects to the MX2800 via the TX and RX amphenol connectors located on the back of the unit and provides 28 pairs of BNC connectors for the individual T1/E1s. Shipment includes two 6-foot, 64-pin to 64-pin amphenol cables for direct cabling to the MX2800. Connect the E1 patch panel’s TX amphenol connector to the MX2800’s IN amphenol connector and the E1 patch panel’s RX amphenol connector to the MX2800's OUT amphenol connector.

61200290L1-1H 2-5

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

REAR PANEL

The MX2800 rear panel is equipped as follows:

• Ethernet local area network (LAN) port

• Modem port

• Two alarm output terminal blocks

• Two sets of DS-3 in/out jacks

• Two amphenol connectors

• DC/AC power connection

• Ground stud

• Three-prong AC connection

• Wire-wrap pins for external connection of BITS clock (STS-1)

Descriptions for the items shown in Figure 2-3

are explained in

“MX2800 Review View Identifiers”

on page 2-6. Pin assignments are given in the tables in “Appendix B, Pinouts”

.

M

O

D

E

M

L

A

N

1

2

NONCRITICAL

3

NO COM NC

CRITICAL

OUT

DS3/STS-1

IN

B

A

4

DSX-1/E1

(OUT)

5

DSX-1/E1

(IN)

Figure 2-3. MX2800 Rear View

DC POWER

PWR

FAIL

+

B

-48V 0.7A

+24V 1.5A

6

PWR

FAIL

A

+

T R S

CLK

A

T R

CLK

B

S

9

7

8

115 AC 50/60Hz

0.8A

6

7

4

5

2

3

#

1

8

9

Table 2-2. MX2800 Review View Identifiers

Item

Ethernet LAN

Modem

Noncritical/Critical

DS3/STS-1

DSX-1/E1

Power

Function

10Base-T Ethernet connection

Telephone line connection for internal V.34

Connections for external audible/visual alarms

T3 service connection for controller cards A and B

64-pin female amphenol connectors for T1/E1s

DC power connection

Ground stud

115 VAC 50/60 Hz

BITS Clock

AC power connection

Wire-wrap pins for external connection of BITS clocks

2-6 61200290L1-1H

Section 2, Installation and Operation - Rear Panel

LAN Port

The LAN port is an 8-pin modular connector that provides a 10Base-T Ethernet LAN interface.

This LAN interface is used for SNMP and Telnet control.

NOTE

Connect the LAN port to intra-building wiring only.

Modem Port

The modem port is an 8-pin modular jack that provides a telephone line (POTS) connection for the internal V.34 modem.

NOTE

Information regarding the built-in modem applies to the part numbers 4202290L1, 4202290L2, 4202290L3, and 4202290L4.

The MX2800 can be configured as a dial-in host and also as a dial-out-on-trap device (the unit dials out to a specified host to report error conditions).

Noncritical and Critical Alarm Connectors

The alarm connectors connect to the three contacts of a Form C type relay on the main board of the MX2800. This relay is activated any time the MX2800 detects an alarm condition on the

T3 network interface. Both NC (normally closed) and NO (normally open) contacts are provided.

Connect alarms to one of the three-position modular terminal lug connectors. These connectors simplify the initial wiring and connection or disconnection of the alarms when replacing rackmount units. Once a modular connector is wired, push it firmly into the rear panel NONCRITICAL or CRITICAL connector.

The alarm functions can be enabled or disabled through the Alarm Relays section of the

Configuration

menu. For more information, refer to “Alarm Relay Configuration” on page 3-30.

DSX-3 Interfaces

The DSX-3 network interfaces are full-duplex circuits provided by four BNC coaxial cable connections (two for each controller card). The receive data from the network is connected to the Rx ( IN ) connectors, while the transmit data from the MX2800 is connected to the Tx ( OUT )

connectors. Refer to “Section 7, Circuit and Network Redundancy” for more specific infor-

mation about connecting the DS3 interface in redundant and nonredundant systems.

NOTE

DSX-3 interfaces must be connected using coaxial cables that have the shields grounded at both ends.

61200290L1-1H 2-7

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

DSX-1/E1 Interfaces

The DSX-1/E1 interfaces are 64-pin amphenol connectors. These interfaces provide Tx and

Rx connections between the unit and equipment such as wire-wrap patch panels, punchdown panels, or breakout panels.

NOTE

Connect the DSX-1/E1 interfaces to intra-building wiring only.

Power Connection

The DC power connections are described in

“Power Up” on page 2-2.

2-8 61200290L1-1H

Section 2, Installation and Operation - Front Panel

FRONT PANEL

The MX2800 front panel is shown in Figure 2-4 . Descriptions of each part of the front panel

follow:

“Craft Port” on page 2-9

“ACO Buttons” on page 2-15

“Power Supply A/B Status LEDs” on page 2-15

“Controller Cards Status LEDs” on page 2-15

“T1/E1 Status LEDs” on page 2-17

A

C

T

N

E

T

A

L

M

P

R

F

Figure 2-4. MX2800 Front Panel

Craft Port

The craft port, an 8-pin modular jack, provides connection to a VT100 EIA-232 compatible interface (using the supplied 8-pin modular to DB-9 female connector and the 8-pin to 8-pin modular cable).

Establishing Terminal Connection

NOTE

A Telnet menu session has priority over a terminal menu session through the craft port. If a terminal menu session is active when a

Telnet menu session is initiated, the terminal menu session will be disabled while the Telnet menu session is active.

To connect the MX2800 to a VT100 terminal, follow this procedure:

1. Configure the VT100 terminal for 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 baud, 8-bit characters, no parity, and one stop bit (xxxx, 8N1).

2. Using the ADTRAN-provided terminal interface cable adapter, connect the DTE port of a terminal to the 8-pin modular jack labeled CRAFT on the MX2800 front panel.

3. Initialize the terminal session.

4. Press E NTER

repeatedly until the username prompt appears.

5. Enter the username. The factory default username is adtran. The password prompt appears.

6. Enter the password. The factory default password is adtran. The Main Menu appears. See

Figure 2-5 on page 2-10.

61200290L1-1H 2-9

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Main Menu

Make selections on the Main Menu by entering the number corresponding to the chosen

parameter or the desired key strokes. Refer to “Navigating Within the Menus” on page 2-11

NOTE

A new Telnet session may take priority over an existing one if a username and password are provided that have ADMIN privileges

2-10

Figure 2-5. Main Menu

NOTE

The letter displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the terminal menu indicates which controller card is active (A or B).

61200290L1-1H

Section 2, Installation and Operation - Front Panel

Navigating Within the Menus

Navigate within the MX2800 terminal menus using the procedures in

Table 2-3 .

To...

select an item scroll left and right within the same screen return to the previous menu end the terminal session refresh the display scroll up and down within the same screen

Table 2-3. Navigation Procedures

Press...

the number corresponding to your choice, and then press the

E NTER

key the left and right arrow keys. Additional screens are available when < or > is displayed in the top portion of the menu the E

SC

key

C

TRL

+

C

C

TRL

+R the up and down arrow keys. Additional screens are available when Ÿ or ∨ is displayed in the top portion of the menu.

The MX2800 Main Menu consists of the following sections:

“Status” on page 2-12

“Statistics” on page 2-12

“Configuration” on page 2-13

“Loopbacks” on page 2-13

“Telnet Client” on page 2-14

“Logout” on page 2-15

“Privilege Level” on page 2-15

61200290L1-1H 2-11

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Status

Provides information on the current state of the DS3, power supplies, system, DS2s, and T1/

E1 lines. See Figure 2-6

for an illustration. Refer to “Section 4, Status”

for more detailed information.

Figure 2-6. Status Menu

Statistics

Provides detailed statistical information (both current and historical) for the DS3, DS2s, and

T1/E1 lines. See Figure 2-7 on page 2-12 for the Statistics

menu. Refer to

“Section 5,

Statistics”

for more detailed information.

2-12

Figure 2-7. Statistics Menu

61200290L1-1H

Section 2, Installation and Operation - Front Panel

Configuration

Sets DS3 network, T1/E1, and system management parameters. See

Figure 2-8 . Refer to

“Section 3, Configuration”

for more detailed information.

Figure 2-8. Configuration Menu

Loopbacks

Performs loopback tests over the DS3, DS2s, or T1/E1 lines. See Figure 2-9 for an illustration

of the Loopback Menu. Refer to “Section 6, Loopbacks”

for more detailed information.

61200290L1-1H

Figure 2-9. Loopback Menu

2-13

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Telnet Client

A Telnet session may be established with any device visible in the network from the MX2800.

See Figure 2-10 on page 2-14 for an illustration of the Telnet Client menu.

Figure 2-10. Telnet Client Menu

From the Telnet Client menu, specify the destination IP address and the desired TCP port number. Attempt to establish the TCP connection.

Once the connection is established, the new session becomes visible in the menu and all user inputs are forwarded to the destination address. When the session with the destination device is terminated, the MX2800 menu returns to the Telnet Client menu and all user input are processed locally by the MX2800.

NOTE

An attempted or established connection can be terminated by using the escape sequence. This escape sequence is displayed for reference at the bottom of the Telnet Client menu and consists of the control key plus the right bracket key ( C TRL +]) .

A connection can be established with the Telnet Client regardless of how the MX2800 (via craft, LAN port, modem port, or IP forwarding over the DS3 PMDL link) is accessed. The

MX2800 supports only one menu session at a time.

2-14 61200290L1-1H

Section 2, Installation and Operation - Front Panel

CAUTION

The MX2800 does not reliably support binary file transfers

(XModem, YModem, etc.) over the built-in Telnet Client because of compatibility issues involving the handling of certain control characters by some terminal applications and binary file transfer protocols.

Logout

The Logout selection ends the terminal session and logs out of the system. A valid username and password are required before a new session can begin. The unit will also log out of a terminal session automatically if the session remains inactive for a certain period of time. For more information, see the section

“Terminal Time Out” on page 3-30.

Privilege Level

The privilege level of the currently active terminal session is displayed in this field.

ACO Buttons

The ACO (alarm cut off) buttons turn off an active audible alarm. Since the buttons are recessed, use a pen or other pointed instrument to press them. Once an ACO button deactivates an alarm, the alarm remains disabled until the condition has cleared.

Alarms can also be turned off remotely by using a selection found in the Status menu. For more

information, refer to “Acknowledge Alarms (ACO)” on page 4-7.

LED Descriptions

The MX2800 has LED status indicators for the power supplies, the DS3 state, the controller cards, and the individual T1s/E1s. These LEDs are identified below:

Power Supply A/B Status LEDs

The PWR LED is active when the unit is on and receiving full power. The CHK LED is active when the power supply is failing or is providing low power and needs to be checked.

Controller Cards Status LEDs

The STATUS LEDs apply to the two controller cards. The LEDs provided are ACT (active), DS3 ,

ALM (alarm), and PRF (performance). Various conditions are indicated by the state of the LED

(its color and whether it blinks, alternates color, or is on solid). The condition descriptions vary depending on whether the LED represents the active controller card or the controller card

on standby. The following tables provide LED definitions for the active cards (see Table 2-4 on page 2-16) and T1/E1 cards (see Table 2-5 on page 2-16).

61200290L1-1H 2-15

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

LED

ACT

NET

ALM

PRF z

2 z

2 z z

2

2 z z z / z z z z / z

2 z

2 z z

2 z / z

LED State

Green solid

Green/amber alternating

Red solid

Amber solid

Red/amber alternating

Red blinking

Green solid

Red blinking

Red solid

Amber solid

Amber flashing

Red/amber alternating

Green solid

Red blinking

Red solid

Amber blinking

Amber solid

Green solid

Red flash (once per event)

Red blinking

Red solid

Table 2-4. LED Conditions for Active Cards

Card Condition

Normal (all OK)

Normal and console open

Self test failed

Software update in progress

Self test failed and console open

Card failure

Normal (all OK)

LOS

AIS, LOF, RAI, idle alarms

In test (Local)

In test (Remote)

In test with alarms

Normal (no alarm)

Critical alarm

Non-critical alarm

Critical alarm suppressed (ACO button was pushed)

Non-critical alarm suppressed (ACO button was pushed)

Normal (all OK)

Single/burst CV

Continuous code violations

XCV threshold exceeded (refer to

“XCV Threshold” on page 3-13)

NOTE

The PRF (performance) LED refers to the DS3 only

LED

ACT

NET

ALM

PRF

Table 2-5. LED Conditions for Standby Cards

2 z

2

{

2

{ Off

{ Off

LED State

Green blinking

Amber solid

Red blinking

Off

Red blinking

Card Condition

Normal (all OK)

Software update in progress

Self test failed

Normal (all OK)

DS3 failure

Normal (no alarm)

Normal (all OK)

2-16 61200290L1-1H

Section 2, Installation and Operation - Front Panel

T1/E1 Status LEDs

These LEDs apply to each individual T1 or E1. Various conditions are indicated by the state of the LED (its color and whether it blinks, alternates color, or is on solid). The condition descriptions vary depending on whether the LEDs represent T1s or E1s of the active controller card

or the controller card on standby. Table 2-6

provides LED definitions for the active and standby cards.

LED

Active

Card z

{

2

2 z

Table 2-6. T1/E1 LED Conditions

LED State

Green solid

Off

Red blinking

Red flash (once per event)

Red solid

Standby

Card z z / z z / z

{

2

Amber solid

Green/amber alternating

Red/amber alternating

Off

Red blinking

T1/E1 Condition

Normal (all OK)

Disabled

LOS

Single/burst CV

XCV threshold exceeded or AIS (refer to

“XCV Threshold” on page 3-13)

In test (Local)

In test (Remote)

In test with alarms

Normal (all OK) or

N/A (in the case of E1 configuration)

T1/E1 failure

61200290L1-1H 2-17

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

REPLACING OR INSTALLING CARDS

The MX2800 is designed with hot-swappable controller cards and power supplies. To replace or install a controller card or power supply, remove the front cover of the MX2800 with a phillips head screwdriver. Once the front of the MX2800 has been removed, the power supply and controller card slots will be visible. The two power supplies are located at the left of the chassis, and the controller cards are stacked on the right side of the chassis. To remove a card, use the locking lever(s) to pull the backplane connector away from the backplane. Once the backplane connector has been disconnected, carefully pull the card straight out of the chassis. To replace or install a card, line up the card with the guide grooves and carefully insert the card into the chassis until the backplane connector reaches the backplane. Finally, use the locking levers to seat the card all the way into the slot of the chassis. Once all cards

have been replaced or installed, replace the front cover of the MX2800. Figure 2-11

shows how to remove and replace the front cover.

2-18

Figure 2-11. Replacing or Installing Cards

61200290L1-1H

Section 3

Configuration

INTRODUCTION

To configure the MX2800, use a 10Base-T Ethernet connection, a SLIP/PPP modem port, or a

VT100 terminal. Figure 3-1 shows the Configuration menu.

NOTE

A Telnet menu session has priority over a terminal menu session through the craft port. If a terminal menu session is active when a

Telnet menu session is initiated, the terminal menu session will be disabled until the Telnet session is closed.

61200290L1-1H

Figure 3-1. Configuration Menu

3-1

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Detailed descriptions of the menu selections are given in the following subsections. The

Configuration menu provides the following five submenus:

“Network Interface” on page 3-4

“T1/E1 Interface” on page 3-7

“System Management” on page 3-14

“Utilities” on page 3-35

“Save Configuration and Alarm Log” on page 3-41

Figure 3-2 shows the Configuration

menu tree.

3-2 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - Introduction

Network Interface

T1/E1 Interface

System Management

DS3 Configuration

Protection Configuration

Framing

Timing

C-BIT*

M13

Loop*

Local

Disabled

FEAC/C-BIT*

FEAC

C-BIT

Miscellaneous

DS2 Configuration

State

Line Coding

Line Length

Auto Enable Delay

Loopback Detection

Circuit Protection

Line Identification

XCV Threshold

DS2 1-7

T1 # 1-28

Disabled*

IE-3

IE-4

IE-5

IE-6

T1 # 1-28

T1 # 1-28

T1 # 1-28

Remote Loopbacks

XCV Threshold

T1 # 1-28

T1 # 1-28

Active Controller

Network Protection

Max Switch Threshold (3)*

Min Switch Period (10)*

A

B

Disabled*

Enabled

Loopback Time Out

Shutdown Standby

Disabled

Enabled

Auto Enable*

AMI

B8ZS*

Disabled*

CSU

NIU

Disabled

Enabled*

0-133 ft.*

133-266 ft.

266-399 ft.

399-533 ft.

533-655 ft.

Disabled

1 min.

5 min.*

10 min.

15 min.

30 min.

45 min.

1 hour

Mgmt Options

SNMP Mgmt Options

Network Date/ Time Options

System Security

Date & Time Date

Time

Local IP Address

Gateway IP Address

Subnet Mask

Modem Rmt IP Addr (List 1)

Management Port

Forward IP to Remote DS3

DS3 Remote IP Address

DS3 IP MTU

Dialup Options (List 1)

IP Security

IP Hosts

SNMP State

Trap IP Address

Trap Generation

Read Community Name

Write Community Name

Trap Community Name

System Name

State

Server IP Address

Refresh Period

DST Automatic Adjustment

Local Time Zone

User Account Management

Terminal Timeout

Radius Mgmt options

Local User Accounts

Controller Traps

Power Supply Alarm Traps

DS3 Alarm Traps

DS2 Alarm Traps

T1/E1 Alarm Traps

MIB II Standard Alarm Traps

Radius State

Server IP Address

UDP Port

Privilege Level

Shared Secret Visibility

Shared Secret

Response Timeout

Maximum Retries

Disabled*

IE-3

IE-4

IE-5

IE-6

Utilities

Miscellaneous

Load Default Settings

Update FLASH Software

Configuration Transfer

System Reset

Load Default settings OTHER THAN system management

Load SYSTEM MANAGEMENT default settings

Load ALL default settings

Update via XMODEM

Update via TFTP Server

Alarm Relay Configuration

Equipment Identification

Syslog Setup

Auto Save

Craft baud rate

Save Configuration & Alarm Log

* = default settings

Figure 3-2. Configuration Menu Tree

61200290L1-1H 3-3

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

NETWORK INTERFACE

Select Network Interface

to access the network configuration parameters. See Figure 3-3 .

Configure the MX2800 network settings to match the DS3 signal received from the service provider.

Figure 3-3. Network Configuration Menu

DS3 Configuration

The DS3 Configuration selections are used to configure the DS3 network settings to match the desired application. Descriptions of these settings are explained below.

Framing

The framing format is used to match the format of the receive signal at the network interface.

The MX2800 supports C-bit and M13 framing formats.

NOTE

M13 may not be selected when IP Forwarding is active.

Line Length

The line length is set to reflect the physical length of the DS3 network line.

• Long should be used if the cabling distance exceeds 225 feet.

• Short should be used if the distance is less than 225 feet.

3-4 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - Network Interface

NOTE

First and second generation DS3 controller cards (P/N 1200288Lx and P/N 1202288Lx) use Long for distances over 50 feet and Short for distances under 50 feet.

NOTE

Fifth generation DS3 controller cards (P/N 1205288L1, P/N

1205288G1, P/N 1205288L2, and P/N 1205288E2)) do not require a DS3 line length setting; therefore, Line Length does not appear as a menu item.

Timing

When the MX2800 is connected to a network that provides timing, configure the MX2800 for

LOOP timing to derive timing from the network. If the MX2800 is the master timing source for the circuit, configure the MX2800 to LOCAL. In applications where two MX2800s are connected back-to-back with an un-channelized DS3, configure one MX2800 to LOOP and one MX2800 to LOCAL .

Remote Loopbacks

The following four options are available for remote loopbacks:

• FEAC/C-BIT is used t o allow the MX2800 to respond to remote loopback requests received over either the DS3 Far End Alarm and Control (FEAC) channel and/or DS2-level C bits.

This mode is valid in both C-BIT and M13 framing formats.

• FEAC is used to allow the MX2800 to respond only to remote loopback requests received over the DS3 FEAC channel. This mode is valid only when using C-BIT framing. In this mode, DS2 C-bit loopbacks will be ignored.

• C-BIT is used to allow the MX2800 to respond only to remote loopback requests received over DS2 C bits. This mode is available when operating in either C-BIT or M13 framing. In this mode, FEAC loopbacks received when operating in C-BIT framing will be ignored.

• Disabled is used to ignore all out-of-band loopback requests (FEAC and DS2 C-BIT). When

Disabled is selected, the MX2800 will still respond to individual T1 in-band CSU/NIU loopbacks if so configured in the T1/E1 Loopback Detection menu.

NOTE

Choose FEAC/C-BIT via menus in either C-BIT or M13 framing modes; however, there is no FEAC channel when framing is set to

M13. Therefore, no DS3 far end alarms or loopback requests via the FEAC will be valid when the MX2800 is configured for M13.

61200290L1-1H 3-5

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

XCV Threshold

Excessive code violations (XVC) Threshold sets a limit on CVs accepted by the unit before it switches controller cards. If set to Disabled, code violations will not cause the unit to switch controller cards. The threshold limits are described in

Table 3-1 .

Setting

1E -3

1E -4

1E -5

1E -6

Table 3-1. XCV Threshold Limits

The unit switches controller cards if...

More than one out of every 1,000 bits received on the DS3 contains a code violation

More than one out of every 10,000 bits received on the DS3 contains a code violation

More than one out of every 100,000 bits received on the DS3 contains a code violation

More than one out of every 1,000,000 bits received on the DS3 contains a code violation

Protection Configuration

The MX2800 houses two controller cards for 1:1 protection against hardware failure. The two cards can also provide network protection, supporting two T3 circuits simultaneously. The selections in this menu allow customizing the unit’s protection setup.

Active Controller

This field displays A or B, indicating the active controller card. This setting can be used to force the controller cards to switch. For example, if controller card A is active and B is selected, a switch-over occurs immediately.

Network Protection

This field enables or disables the unit’s ability to automatically route information to the backup T3 in the event of a primary T3 failure. If enabled, all information is automatically routed to the backup T3. If disabled, the stand-by controller protects against failures of the active controller.

Maximum Switch Threshold

The value entered in this field determines the number of times per hour the unit is allowed to switch between controller cards. If, in an hour, the cards switch more than the Maximum

Number of Switches, the unit issues a trap and stops switching cards for the next 24 hours.

Refer to

“Trap Descriptions” on page 3-20. The default setting is three times an hour. This

count may be cleared by clearing Protection Switch alarm counts. See

Figure 5-18 on page 5-13.

Min. Switching Period

After the unit switches controller cards, the number of seconds entered in this field must pass before another card switch will be allowed. The default setting is 10 seconds.

3-6 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - T1/E1 Interface

Miscellaneous

The Miscellaneous menu selections are used to configure the Loopback Timeout and

Shutdown Stand-by settings. Descriptions of these settings are explained below.

Loopback Timeout

The Loopback Timeout option is used to set the loopback timeout to one of the following:

• Disabled

• 1 min.

• 5 min.

• 10 min.

• 15 min.

• 30 min.

• 45 min.

• 1 hr.

• 120 min.

Shutdown Stand-By

The Shutdown Stand-by option causes the system to disable the standby controller card, thus making it unavailable for protection switches. Once this option has been selected and the standby controller has been shut down, the option changes to Reset Stand-by. Selecting this option resets and reactivates the standby controller, thus making it available for protection switching.

DS2 Configuration

The MX2800 can individually frame each of the seven DS2 streams in M12 (four T1s) or G.747

(three E1s) format. When set to M12 (4xT1), the four T1s for the selected group are framed per

ANSI T1.107. When set to G.747 (3xE1), the first three T1/E1 ports of the selected group are framed per CCITT G.747 into the DS3 stream. The fourth T1/E1 port of the selected group is not available in this mode. Any combination of M12 (4xT1) and G.747 (3xE1) is allowed.

T1/E1 INTERFACE

The T1/E1 Interface menu, see Figure 3-4 , is used to activate/deactivate individual T1s and

E1s and to set their line coding, length, loopback detection, circuit protection, and line ID string. The T1/E1 code violation threshold is also configured through this menu. Configuration selections are described in the following sections.

61200290L1-1H 3-7

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

NOTE

A DS2 can be divided into either three E1s or four T1s. Therefore, when dealing with an E1 configuration, some of the fields in the

T1/E1 Interface menus do not apply (and therefore display N/A).

Figure 3-4. T1/E1 Interface Menu

T1/E1 State

The T1/E1 lines are set to Disabled, Enabled, or Auto Enable. In Auto Enable, the port is not fully enabled (and alarms are not issued) until a T1/E1 signal is detected on that port’s

receiver for a specified period of time. See Figure 3-5 . This period of time is set by the Auto

Enable Delay option. The options are as follows:

• 2 seconds (default)

• 1 hour

• 2 hours

• 12 hours

• 1 day

• 2 days

• 7 days

3-8 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - T1/E1 Interface

Figure 3-5. T1/E1 State Menu

Set Multiple

The Set Multiple, see Figure 3-6

, option is used to enable or disable a contiguous group or all of the T1/E1s at one time. To enable or disable all T1/E1s, set First to 1 and Last to 28 . Enter

Apply settings before leaving the menu. To enable or disable only some of the T1/E1s, set First and Last to correspond to the desired lines. Enter Apply settings . Either leave the menu at this point or continue to enter new First and Last numbers for other lines.

NOTE

Settings should be applied following each change.

61200290L1-1H

Figure 3-6. Set Multiple Menu

3-9

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

T1/E1 Line Coding

Set the line code for each individual T1/E1 interface to match the connected device. See

Figure 3-7 . The choices available for T1 are AMI and B8ZS. The choices available for E1 are

AMI and HDB3. Select Set Multiple to set a contiguous group or all of the T1s (or E1s) to the same value at the same time. Refer to

“Set Multiple” on page 3-9 for a description of the

Set

Multiple option.

Figure 3-7. T1/E1 Line Coding Menu

T1/E1 Line Length

Set the line length for each T1 interface according to the distance from the MX2800 to the

connecting DSX termination. See Figure 3-8 . The E1 Line Length is not selectable and

remains at 0-6 dB loss. Select Set Multiple to configure the line length for a contiguous group or all of the T1s to the same length at the same time. Refer to

“Set Multiple” on page 3-9 for a

description of the Set Multiple option.

3-10 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - T1/E1 Interface

Figure 3-8. T1/E1 Line Length Menu

T1/E1 Loopback Detection

The T1/E1 Loopback Detection option is used to set how the T1/E1 lines respond to loopback requests coming from the network. See

Figure 3-9

.

Figure 3-9. Loopback Detection Menu

The following options are available for detection:

• Disabled is used to cause the T1/E1 lines to ignore in-band loop-up and loop-down codes.

• CSU is used to cause the channel to loop up or loop down when it receives a CSU loop-up or loop-down pattern for more than 5 seconds.

61200290L1-1H 3-11

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

• NIU is used to cause the channel to loop up or loop down when it receives an NIU loop-up or loop-down pattern for more than 5 seconds.

Select Set Multiple to set a contiguous group or all of the T1/E1s to the same value at the same time. Refer to

“Set Multiple” on page 3-9 for a description of the

Set Multiple option.

T1/E1 Circuit Protection

T1/E1 Circuit Protection determines which circuit is allowed to initiate a protection switch if a failure in the circuitry for that channel is detected. See

Figure 3-10 . If a T1/E1 is set to

Disabled , the failure of the circuitry of that one channel does not cause a protection switch. If set to Enabled , the failure of a channel causes a protection switch to occur if the Protection

Threshold setting in this menu is exceeded.

Figure 3-10. Circuit Protection Menu

The Protection Threshold setting determines how many of the Enabled lines must fail before a card switch occurs. If the failure of a single protected (enabled) line is to cause a card switch, set the Protection Threshold to 1 . Choices include 1 through 28.

Select Set Multiple to set a contiguous group or all of the T1/E1s to the same value at the same time. Refer to

“Set Multiple” on page 3-9 for a description of the

Set Multiple selection.

3-12 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - T1/E1 Interface

T1/E1 Line Identification

This field is used to enter user-configurable text strings to name the individual T1/E1 lines.

See Figure 3-11

. This field will accept up to 18-alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters.

Figure 3-11. Line Identification Menu

XCV Threshold

This value sets a limit on excessive code violations (ECVs) accepted by the unit over an individual T1/E1 line before it switches controller cards. If set to Disabled , code violations will not cause the unit to switch controller cards. The threshold limits are described in

Table 3-2 .

Setting

1E -3

1E

-4

1E -5

1E -6

Table 3-2. XCV Threshold Limits for T1/E1

The unit switches controller cards if...

More than one out of every 1,000 bits received on a T1/E1 line contains a code violation

More than one out of every 10,000 bits received on a T1/E1 line contains a code violation

More than one out of every 100,000 bits received on a T1/E1 line contains a code violation

More than one out of every 1,000,000 bits received on a T1/E1 line contains a code violation

61200290L1-1H 3-13

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

SYSTEM MANAGEMENT

Configure the MX2800 for management through SNMP, Telnet, or a VT100 interface. See

Figure 3-12 . Embedded SNMP and Telnet are available via a SLIP/PPP modem port or 10Base-

T Ethernet interface. This menu also includes options used to customize the unit’s alarm and trap generation, security setup, and equipment identification. The fields of the System

Management Configuration menu vary depending upon the configuration of the options in the shelf.

3-14

Figure 3-12. System Management Configuration Menu

CAUTION

Configuration changes to Local IP Address, Gateway IP Address,

Subnet Mask, and IP Hosts will not be implemented unless all Telnet sessions are closed. Changes made while Telnet sessions are active will invoke a warning message on the console.

NOTE

If the unit is not equipped with an internal modem, Dialup Option will not be available.

61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - System Management

Management Options

The Management options sets the fields that allow SNMP, Telnet, or VT100 interface access.

The options are listed below.

Local IP Address

This field is used to enter the MX2800 IP address. This IP address applies to the LAN or modem port when configured for SLIP/PPP. This address is available from a network administrator.

Gateway IP Address

This field is used to enter the gateway IP address of the MX2800. This address is necessary only if the MX2800 and the network manager are connected through a gateway node. If an IP packet is to be sent to a different network, the unit sends it to the gateway.

Subnet Mask

This field is used to enter the subnet mask of the MX2800. This address is available from a network administrator.

Modem Remote IP Address

This field is used to enter the IP address of a server that accesses the MX2800 via a modem over PPP or SLIP. This option is available only if the Management Port is set to LAN + MODEM or DS3 + MODEM.

Management Port

This field is used to assign the management port as either LAN, MODEM, LAN+MODEM, DS3, or DS3+MODEM. The Modem setting applies only to units equipped with an internal modem.

Forward IP to Remote DS3

This field is used to enable or disable the IP forwarding feature that allows IP access to a remote MX2800 across the DS3 channel. With this feature, the far-end MX2800 appears as if it is on the same LAN as the near-end MX2800. To access any IP related feature on the far-end unit, address packets to the IP address of the far-end unit.

NOTE

If the near-end and far-end MX2800s are currently on the same

LAN, it is important to configure the far-end MX2800 Management

Port option for DS3 or DS3 + MODEM before enabling Forward IP

To Remote DS3 on the near-end unit. Doing so prevents multiple

MAC addresses from being associated with the same IP address in the networks ARP tables.

61200290L1-1H 3-15

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

NOTE

The DS3 must be up and running error-free and using C-Bit framing (this feature will not work with M13 framing). The Management

Port option for the near-end unit (one connected to the Ethernet

LAN) must be set to either LAN or LAN + MODEM. A valid IP

Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway must be entered for the near-end unit.

DS3 Remote IP Address

If Forward IP to Remote DS3 is Enabled, set the DS3 Remote IP Address to a valid IP address on the same subnet as the near-end unit. All packets that are sent to this IP address will be forwarded across the DS3 channel to the far-end unit.

NOTE

The IP Address of the remote unit must be the same as the one that is entered for the DS3 Remote IP Address in the near-end unit's menus. The Management Port option for the far-end unit must also be set to DS3 or DS3+MODEM to be managed remotely over the

DS3. The Subnet Mask and Default Gateway do not need to be set in the far-end unit's menus. The DS3 Remote IP Address must be on the same subnet as the Local IP Address.

DS3 IP MTU

This field is used to select the maximum IP datagram size (in bytes) for the IP forwarding link over the DS3. This option should be left at it default and preferred value of 260. If and only if the device on the other side of the DS3 facility is an ADTRAN device that also has this option, then both side can be set to 1500 to avoid fragmentation of large packets. Otherwise, leave the setting at 260 to avoid lost packets.

Dialup Options

This field is used to configure the dialup capabilities of the MX2800. See Figure 3-13 . These

options apply only to units equipped with an internal modem.

3-16 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - System Management

Figure 3-13. Dialup Options Menu

Primary and Secondary Phone Numbers

When the MX2800 dials out to send a trap, it first dials the Primary Phone Number. If the call is unsuccessful, it tries the Secondary Phone Number. Attempts between the two numbers continue until a call is established and the trap is reported (or until each number’s maximum for redial attempts is reached). Refer to

“Maximum Redial Attempts” on page 3-17.

Initializing String

The AT command entered in this field is used to initialize the modem. Normally, this field should be left at the default setting (ATZ).

Dial String

The AT command entered in this field causes the modem to dial out. Normally, this field should be left at the default setting (ATDT).

Maximum Redial Attempts

The MX2800 attempts to establish a call the number of times entered in this field. If a successful call is not established after the final attempt, the MX2800 discards the trap messages.

Idle Timeout

After establishing a call and sending trap messages, the MX2800 remains online for the amount of seconds entered in this field. If the field is set to 0, the unit hangs up as soon as the trap is sent.

61200290L1-1H 3-17

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Connection Timeout

The MX2800 waits for a connection for the number of seconds entered in this field. Timing begins as soon as the dial command is issued. This field must be set for greater than 20 seconds.

Pause Between Calls

The MX2800 waits between redial attempts for the number of seconds entered in this field.

Dialout On Trap

This field is used to enable or disable the MX2800’s ability to dial out to report traps. Modem

Mode configured for VT-100 reports error conditions in plain ASCII with the following information:

• The Unit ID value programmed in the Equipment Identification portion of the System

Management screen. Refer to “System Management” on page 3-14.

• A trap code indicating the error condition

• A text description of the fault

• The date and time when the error was logged

When Modem Mode is configured for PPP or SLIP, the MX2800 logs into the PPP/SLIP host and reports the error conditions to the hosts designated under Trap IP Addresses. Refer to

“Trap IP Addresses” on page 3-19.

Answer on Ring

This option enables or disables the MX2800’s ability to accept incoming calls. If enabled, incoming calls are automatically answered by the MX2800, allowing remote performance of management functions.

Modem Mode

This field is used to select the Modem port function for the desired application (VT-100, PPP, or SLIP). The Modem port, located on the rear panel of the MX2800, provides a telephone line

(POTS) for connection to the internal V.34 modem. This setting applies only if the

Management Port is set to Modem. Refer to “Management Port” on page 3-15.

Modem Baud Rate

This option is used to set the maximum operating speed in bps of the Modem port:

• 1200

• 2400

• 4800

• 9600

• 19200

• 38400

3-18 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - System Management

Hangup

Selecting this option forces the MX2800 to end an established call.

Last Modem Response

This status field displays the last modem response to the MX2800. Possible responses are as follows:

• OK

• Connect

• Busy

• Error

• No Dialtone

• No Carrier

SNMP Management Options

SNMP State

Use this menu to Enable or Disable SNMP for the MX2800. When disabled, the MX2800 ignores all incoming SNMP packets and does not transmit SNMP packets.

Trap IP Addresses

This field is used to enter up to five IP addresses of SNMP managers to which the MX2800 sends traps.

Trap Generation

Use this menu, see

Figure 3-14 , to designate which error conditions cause the unit to send

trap messages.

61200290L1-1H

Figure 3-14. Trap Generation Menu

3-19

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Table 3-3 provides trap descriptions.

Table 3-3. Trap Descriptions

Trap If enabled, the unit issues a trap when...

Controller Traps

Protection Switch

Card Removed

Card Failure

The controller cards switch.

A controller card has been removed.

A controller card has failed.

The controller cards can no longer communicate with each other.

Communication

Fail

Max Switches

Power Supply Alarm Traps

Card Removed The power supply card has been removed.

Malfunction

The Max Switch Threshold is reached. For more information, refer to

“Maximum Switch Threshold” on page 3-6.

The power supply card is no longer working and the unit has switched to the backup power supply or battery backup.

Card Failure

Power Low

Bat. Backup Act

Battery Low

Temperature High

Temperature

Critical

The power supply card has failed.

The power supply’s output level is abnormally low.

Battery charger has lost its AC power source.

Battery backup has reached an energy point insufficient to supply the unit with power.

The power supply card is getting too hot.

The power supply card temperature is so high that it may suffer damage.

DS3 Alarm Traps (Near-End Active and Standby Cards)

LOS The controller card has lost the network Rx signal.

OOF

AIS

The controller card detects a framing loss from the network.

The controller card is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network.

AIS alarms occur when consecutive 1010s are received in the information bits.

This indicates that

The controller card is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network.

This alarm occurs when consecutive 1010s are received in the information bits, indicating there is a transmission fault located either at or upstream from the transmitting terminal.

RAI

IDLE

The controller card is receiving an RAI (yellow) alarm from the network. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The

X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to zero.

The controller card detects an idle sequence from the network.

3-20 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - System Management

Table 3-3. Trap Descriptions (Continued)

Trap If enabled, the unit issues a trap when...

TX LOS

XCV

In/Out Test The DS3 is going in and out of test (applies to the Active controller card only).

DS3 Alarm Traps (Far-End Active Cards)

LOS

OOF

The remote unit’s active controller card has lost the network Rx signal.

The remote unit’s active controller card detects a framing loss from the network.

AIS

RAI

The controller card’s transmitter has failed.

The controller card is receiving excessive code violations, exceeding the threshold set by the user. For more information, refer to

“XCV Threshold” on page 3-6.

The remote unit’s active controller card is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network.

The remote unit’s active controller card is receiving an RAI (yellow) alarm from the network. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to zero.

IDLE

DS3 Eqpt Fail SA

The remote unit’s active controller card detects an idle sequence from the network.

The remote unit’s active controller card is receiving a service-affecting equipment failure message from the network.

DS3 Eqpt Fail NSA The remote unit’s active controller card is receiving a non-service-affecting equipment failure message from the network.

Comn Eqpt Fail

NSA

The remote unit’s active controller card is receiving a common equipment failure message from the network.

DS2 Alarm Traps

OOF

AIS

The DS2 detects a framing loss from the network.

The DS2 is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network. AIS alarms occur when the unit is receiving unframed all ones.

RAI The DS2 is receiving an RAI (yellow) alarm from the network. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bit is set to zero.

Local T1/E1 Alarm Traps

LOS The unit has lost the Rx signal on a T1/E1.

carrier side AIS

(CAIS)

The T1 is receiving all ones from the DS3 side of the network.

loop side AIS (LAIS) The T1 is receiving all ones from the DSX-1 interface.

XCV The unit is receiving excessive code violations across a T1/E1, exceeding the

configured threshold. For more information, refer to “XCV Threshold” on page 3-13.

61200290L1-1H 3-21

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Table 3-3. Trap Descriptions (Continued)

Trap If enabled, the unit issues a trap when...

T1/E1 Failure

In/Out Test

A T1/E1 has failed.

A T1/E1 is going in or out of test.

Far-End Alarms (available only in C-Bit Parity mode)

Multiple DS1 LOS The far-end equipment has lost multiple T1/E1 lines.

Single DS1 LOS

DS1 Eqpt Fail SA

The far-end equipment has lost a single T1/E1.

A service-affecting equipment failure is being reported by the far-end.

DS1 Eqpt Fail NSA A non-service-affecting equipment failure is being reported by the far-end.

MIB II Standard Alarm Traps

Cold Start

Link Up

Link Down

Authentication

Failure

The unit is first powered up.

The DS3 is up with no alarms.

The DS3 is in alarm.

An attempt has been made by an unauthorized user to access the unit.

Read Community Name

This field is used to enter the authentication strings used for SNMP management. Match the

MX2800 to the SNMP manager for read privileges.

Write Community Name

This field is used to enter the authentication strings used for SNMP management. Match the

MX2800 to the SNMP manager for write privileges.

Trap Community Name

This field is used to enter the identification string used for trap management. This string accompanies all traps transmitted by the MX2800.

System Name

This value is equivalent to the sysName item defined in RFC1213. The value is an administratively-assigned name for the managed node. By convention, this is the node's fully-qualified domain name.

3-22 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - System Management

Network Date/Time Option

The MX2800 is capable of having the date and time provisioned from a remote server using one of two supported protocols: SNTP version 3 (per RFC1769) and Network Time (per

RFC868).

Several options are available for provisioning this feature, all of which are accessible only via menus by users with Admin-level privileges. These options reside in the System Management menu.

State

This option sets the mode or protocol used to retrieve the date and time from the server.

Possible values are Disabled, SNTP, and Net Time. When the State option is set to Disabled, the user should explicitly set the date and time locally (via menus, TL1, or SNMP). If the State option is set to SNTP or Net Time, then the product prevents any attempt to set the time locally. The default value is Disabled.

Server IP Address

This option sets the IP address of the server to be queried for the date and time.

Refresh Period

This option sets the length of time between queries to the server. The available values range are as follows:

• 1 minutes interval

• 5 minutes interval

• 10 minutes interval

• 15 minutes interval (default)

• 20 minutes interval

• 25 minutes interval

• 30 minutes interval

• 35 minutes interval

• 40 minutes interval

• 45 minutes interval

• 50 minutes interval

• 55 minutes interval

• 60 minutes interval

DST Automatic Adjustment

This option sets automatic adjustment for North American daylight saving time. Available values are Enabled and Disabled. The default value is Enabled. This automatic adjustment is performed only in association with responses from the server. The automatic adjustment does not take place if the State option is disabled and/or if the server cannot be contacted.

61200290L1-1H 3-23

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Local Time Zone

This option sets the time zone in which the MX2800 unit is located. Possible values consist of

North American time zones from Hawaii-Aleutian Standard Time to Atlantic Standard Time.

The default value is Eastern Standard Time.

NOTE

The MX2800 processes only the Transmit Timestamp value of all

SNTP response messages. Other constructs supported by the protocol (such as root delay, root dispersion, authentication, etc.) are not processed by the MX2800.

System Security

User Account Management

This option is used to enter up to 15 user accounts. Each user account is assigned a username, password, and privilege level. Usernames and passwords are not case sensitive but must be 12 characters or less. Each user account is assigned a privilege level to provide the option of limiting a user's access to the MX2800. The four privilege levels are listed below.

Guest

A user with this read-only privilege level can view almost all menu items on the console interface menus and can perform a limited number of TL1 commands, none of which can alter the product's configuration.

Interface

A user with write-access privilege level can configure items related to the network interface and T1/E1 interface but can not initiate loopbacks and view and/or alter several system-level items such as LAN configurables.

Test

A user with write-access privilege level can configure the network interface and T1/E1 interface and can initiate loopbacks but may not view and/or alter several system-level items such as LAN configurables, etc.

Admin

With Admin privilege level, all menu items can be viewed and/or altered. Only a user with an

Admin user account can alter the User Account Management information.

User accounts provide access to the MX2800 for console interface sessions and TL1 sessions.

Table 3-4 on page 3-27 provides a summary of privileges.

3-24 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - System Management

NOTE

The Load Default Settings menu item that is located on the Configuration/

Utilities menu resets the User Account Management table back to the factory default account adtran/adtran/admin .

RADIUS Authentication

The MX2800 is capable of communicating with a RADIUS server for authentication of menu users and TL1 users. The RADIUS authentication support is implemented per RFC2865. User account information in the onboard user database will remain intact when the MX2800 is upgraded to support authentication via RADIUS.

Several options are available for provisioning RADIUS authentication features, all of which are accessible only via menus and by users with Admin-level privileges.

RADIUS State

This option sets the RADIUS authentication capabilities as either Enabled or Disabled. The default value is Disabled .

When the RADIUS State value is Enabled, the following behavior applies when a user enters a username and password at the MX2800. The MX2800 first authenticates the username and password against the local user database. If local authentication succeeds, then access is granted to the MX2800 with the privilege level assigned for that account in the onboard database. Local authentication is considered successful if both the username and password are authenticated, regardless of the privilege level (including Disabled).

If local authentication does not succeed, then the username and password are authenticated against the RADIUS server. If the RADIUS authentication succeeds, then access to the

MX2800 is granted with the RADIUS Privilege Level set by the user. If the RADIUS authentication does not succeed, which includes the case where the MX2800 does not receive a response from the server, then the user is denied access to the MX2800.

Regardless of whether the RADIUS State option is Enabled or Disabled at the MX2800, each user account that exists in the local user database may be assigned one of the defined privilege levels for the MX2800 (Disabled, Guest, Interface, Test, or Admin). Only a user with the Admin privilege level can access the local database and the RADIUS options.

Usernames and passwords stored in the local user database are each limited to 11 ASCII characters. Usernames and passwords authenticated via RADIUS may each have up to 63

ASCII characters.

When RADIUS authentication is disabled, safeguards are in place that will prevent an Adminlevel user from deleting all Admin-level accounts in the onboard user database. When RADIUS authentication is enabled, an Admin-level user who was authenticated through RADIUS will be allowed to delete all of the onboard accounts. This will be allowed to avoid some potential security concerns.

Safeguards will exist that will prevent certain combinations of options involving RADIUS and the local user database that would effectively remove all means of accessing the MX2800 with

Admin privileges.

The recovery mechanism for gaining access via the challenge password (ADTRAN-

PLEASEHELP) is supported regardless of whether the RADIUS authentication option is

61200290L1-1H 3-25

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual enabled or disabled. When a user enters this password, the MX2800 issues a unique challenge sequence that requires a response provided by ADTRAN Tech Support for access to the unit.

Local user accounts and passwords for the MX2800 are not case-sensitive. However, case is preserved for both username and password when authenticating through RADIUS. The TL1 input message specification limits the characters that may be sent as part of a TL1 command, unless the string is enclosed in double quotes. This is important when RADIUS authentication is used for authenticating TL1 sessions. Passwords or usernames with special characters must be placed in double quotes in the ACT-USER command. If double quotes appear inside the TL1 username or password, each double quote character must be immediately preceded by the backslash character to avoid confusion with the double quotes surrounding the username or password.

The MX2800 supports Challenge response messages from the RADIUS server regardless of whether the login attempt is made via menus or TL1. If a Challenge response is received from the server, then the user is prompted for additional information. The nature of this additional information is application-dependent. When the Challenge response is received during an attempt to log in via TL1, then a PLNA TL1 response is returned to the user and the Challenge message is provided in the TL1 comment field.

Server IP Address

This option sets the IP address of the server to be queried for authentication. The default value is a null IP address. One IP address is supported.

UDP Port

This option sets the UDP port of the server. The default value is 1812.

Privilege Level

This option sets a single privilege level that applies for all users that are granted access via remote authentication. The possible values are Disabled , Guest , Interface , Test , and Admin . The default value is Guest . Refer to the appropriate MX2800 documentation for explanations of these privilege levels.

Shared Secret Visibility

This option sets the visibility of the Shared Secret value as displayed in the provisioning menu for RADIUS authentication options. The possible values are Visible and Invisible . When this option is set to Invisible , the Shared Secret value is masked with asterisk characters. The default value is Invisible .

Shared Secret

This option sets the shared secret that is used during the process of authenticating via the

RADIUS server. This value is a case-sensitive ASCII character string that has a maximum length of 63 ASCII characters. The default value is a null string.

3-26 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - System Management

Response Timeout

This option sets the number of seconds the MX2800 will wait for a response before retransmitting the request.

Maximum Retries

This option sets the maximum number of retransmissions of an authentication request that the MX2800 will attempt in the absence of a response from the server.

Console Menu Item

Table 3-4. Console Menu User Privileges

Privilege level(s) under which a user may alter (and in some cases, view) this item

Guest Interface Test Admin

Status Menu

Acknowledge alarms

Statistics Menus

Clear statistics (for all Statistics menus)

Reset alarm log

Configuration – Network Interface Menu

DS3 framing mode

DS3 line length (L1 Controller Card only)

DS3 timing

DS3 loopback detection

DS3 XCV threshold

Active controller

Network protection

DS3 max switch threshold

DS3 min switching period

Loopback time out

Shutdown stand-by controller

Reset stand-by controller

DS2 #1-7 mode (T1 or E1)

Configuration – T1/E1 Interface Menu

T1/E1 state

T1/E1 line coding

T1/E1 line length

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

61200290L1-1H 3-27

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Table 3-4. Console Menu User Privileges (Continued)

Console Menu Item

T1/E1 loopback detection

T1/E1 circuit protection

T1/E1 protection threshold

T1/E1 line identification

T1/E1 XCV threshold

Configuration – System Management Menu

Local IP address

Gateway IP address

Subnet mask

Modem remote IP address (controller with modem)

Management port

Forward IP to remote DS3

DS3 remote IP address

Dial-up Option menu (controller with modem)

DS3 IP MTU

System Name

SNMP Management Option menu

Network Date/Time Option menu

User Account Management menu

Terminal time out

IP security

IP hosts

Date

Time

Alarm Relay Configuration menu

Equipment ID menu

Syslog Setup menu

Save-on-logout

Craft baud rate

Privilege level(s) under which a user may alter (and in some cases, view) this item

Guest Interface Test Admin

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

3-28 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - System Management

Table 3-4. Console Menu User Privileges (Continued)

Console Menu Item

Privilege level(s) under which a user may alter (and in some cases, view) this item

Guest Interface Test Admin

Telnet Client menu

IP Address

TCP Port

Connect

Configuration – Utilities Menu

Load default settings

Update flash software

Configuration transfer

System reset

Configuration – Protection Switching Menu

Active controller

Max switch threshold

Min switching period

Loopback Menu

T1/E1 loopbacks

DS2 loopbacks

X

X

X

DS3 loopbacks

Reset all tests

Clear BERR

Save Configuration & Alarm Log X X

Logout X X

Note: “X” denotes a privilege level that allows execution of the associated menu item.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

61200290L1-1H 3-29

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Terminal Time Out

Set the amount of time the terminal or Telnet session remains inactive before automatically closing the session, requiring the user to log in again. Options include the following:

• Disabled

• 1 min.

• 5 min.

• 15 min.

• 60 min.

• 1 day.

IP Security

Enable or disable the IP Security option. If IP Security is set to Enabled, the unit accepts management commands and Telnet sessions from the IP addresses entered into the IP Hosts fields.

IP Hosts

Enter up to 16 IP addresses of management stations from which the unit should accept management commands. These addresses are applicable only if IP Security is Enabled.

Date and Time

Enter date and time information. Enter the month, date, and year separated by forward slashes (02/23/04). Enter the time in military time separated by colons (13:15:25).

Miscellaneous

The Miscellaneous option of the System management menu sets the fields and values for the

• Alarm Relay Configuration

• Equipment Identification

• Syslog Setup

• Auto Save

• Craft baud rate

Alarm Relay Configuration

This menu enables and disables audible and visible alarms for specific error conditions. See

Figure 3-15 .

3-30 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - System Management

Figure 3-15. Alarm Relay Configuration Menu

Table 3-5 describes the alarm conditions found in the

Alarm Relay Configuration menu.

Alarm

DS3 Alarms

RAI

Table 3-5. Types of Alarms in Alarm Relay Configuration

Level Description

Critical

AIS

LOS

LOF

XCV

Critical

Critical

Critical

Noncritical

Critical

The unit is receiving an RAI (yellow) alarm from the network. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to zero.

The unit is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm from the network. This alarm occurs when consecutive 1010s are received in the information bits, indicating the fault lies at or upstream from the transmitting source.

The unit has lost the network Rx signal.

The unit detects a framing loss from the network.

The controller card is receiving code violations in excess of the user specified threshold. Refer to

“XCV Threshold” on page 3-13.

The controller card transmitter has failed.

TLOS

DS2 Alarms

RAI Noncritical

AIS

LOF

Noncritical

Noncritical

The unit is receiving an RAI (yellow) alarm from the network across a DS2. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to zero.

The unit is receiving unframed all ones across a DS2.

The unit detects a framing loss from the network across a DS2.

61200290L1-1H 3-31

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Table 3-5. Types of Alarms in Alarm Relay Configuration (Continued)

Alarm Level

System Alarms

Controller Card

A/B Fail

Critical

Protection Switch Critical

Description

Controller Card A/B has failed.

1

The unit detects a Controller Card protection switch. Data is routed from the primary to stand-by card.

The Controller Cards can no longer communicate.

Communication

Fail

Noncritical

T1/E1 Alarms 2

LOS

XCV

Noncritical

Noncritical

The unit has lost the receive signal on a T1/E1.

The controller card is receiving code violations in excess of the user specified threshold. Refer to

“XCV Threshold” on page 3-13

The T1 is receiving all ones from the DS3 side of the network.

Carrier Side AIS

(CAIS)

Loop Side AIS

(LAIS)

Noncritical

Noncritical

Power Supply Alarms

Malfunction Noncritical

The T1 is receiving all ones from the DSX-1 interface.

Power Low

Power Fail

Noncritical

Noncritical

Power supply card is no longer working. The unit has switched to the backup power supply or battery backup.

Power supply’s output level is abnormally low.

Power supply card does not detect power input.

Bat. Backup Act

Battery Low

Noncritical

Noncritical

Battery charger has lost its AC power source.

Battery backup has reached an energy point insufficient to supply the unit with power.

Power supply card temperature is above normal.

Temperature

High

Noncritical

Temperature

Critical

Noncritical Power supply card temperature is so high that it may suffer damage.

1. This is a critical alarm only when Inactive Card is not installed or is not working.

2. T1/E1 alarms are cleared when the T1/E1 is disabled or set to Auto Enable after receiving an alarm.

Equipment Identification

These fields are used to store information that identifies the unit. See Figure 3-16

. Information provided for the far-end is read-only. Local information is read/write from this menu.

3-32 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - System Management

Figure 3-16. Equipment Identification Menu

Unit ID

This option provides a user-configurable text string for the name of the MX2800. This name can help distinguish between different installations. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this field. This information is locally stored and displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the MX2800 terminal screens. This identifier is used as the system’s TID for TL1.

Facility ID

The Facility ID Code supports 38 alphanumeric characters and provides user-configurable text strings to identify the MX2800 over the network. This information is transmitted over the

DS3 on the equipment ID channel.

Location ID

The Location ID Code supports 10 alphanumeric characters and provides user-configurable text strings to identify the MX2800 over the network.

Frame ID

The Frame ID Code supports 10 alphanumeric characters and provides user-configurable text strings to identify the MX2800 over the network.

Unit Code

The Unit Code supports 6 alphanumeric characters and provides user-configurable text strings to identify the MX2800 over the network.

Equipment Codes

The Equipment Code supports 10 alphanumeric characters and provides user-configurable text strings to identify the MX2800 over the network.

61200290L1-1H 3-33

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Syslog Setup

These selections include Transmission, Host IP Address, Severity Level, and Host Facility.

Transmission

This option enables or disables the transmission of log events to the external Syslog server.

The host IP address must be defined first.

Host IP Address

This option specifies the IP address of the external server that is running the Syslog host daemon.

Severity Level

This option specifies the lowest level of severity that causes messages to be logged to the

Syslog server. The levels are listed in Step 3-6

in order of decreasing severity. Any message at or above a selected severity level will be logged if a transmission is enabled.

Level

Emergency

Alert

Critical

Error

Warning

Notice

Info

Debug

Table 3-6. Syslog Severity Levels

Description

The system is unusable.

An action must be taken immediately.

Shows critical conditions.

Shows error conditions.

Shows warning conditions.

Shows normal but significant conditions.

Shows informational messages.

Shows a debug-level message.

Host Facility

This option specifies the facility destination of log events. Facilities are located on the host and are managed by the Syslog host daemon running on either a UNIX machine or a PC. Options include Local 0-7 .

Auto Save

Enable this function to save the configuration every five minutes and upon logout. Disable this option if the configuration is not to be saved. The configuration may be saved manually from the Configuration menu.

Craft Baud Rate

This value sets the rate at AUTO, 9600, 19200, 38400, and 57600 baud rate.

3-34 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - Utilities

UTILITIES

The System Utilities

menu, see Figure 3-17 , is used to view MX2800 system information for

both controller cards:

• Self-test results

• Revert to default configuration settings

• Flash-load a new version of software

• Transfer configuration information to and from a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server

• Reset the system

Figure 3-17. System Utilities Menu

Possible results for the self-test are listed in

Table 3-7

.

61200290L1-1H 3-35

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

If the self test results are...

PASS

BAD RAM DATA

BAD RAM ADDRESS

BAD CODE CHECKSUM

BAD BOOT SECTOR

IOX PROGRAM FAILURE

AFE PROGRAM FAILURE

MODEM FAILURE

ETHERNET FAILURE

DS3 FAILURE

DSX FAILURE

CONFIGURATION CORRUPT

Table 3-7. Self-Test Results

Then...

The self-test was successful and the unit is ready to use.

Contact ADTRAN Technical Support. For more information, refer

to “Appendix F, Warranty” .

Select Save Configuration from the Configuration menu. If the condition persists, contact ADTRAN Technical Support.

Loading Default Settings

Select Load Default Settings from the Utilities menu. Three options are available for loading default settings.

Load Default Settings Other Than System Management

This option defaults all Network and T1/E1 interfaces but does not change management-

related options. Refer to “Management Options” on page 3-15 for the management-related

options.

CAUTION

Loading the default settings will set the T1/E1 state of all DS1 ports to Auto Enable .

Load System Management Default Settings

This option defaults all management-related settings but does not default settings for Network and T1/E1 interfaces.

CAUTION

Loading the default settings will set the T1/E1 state of all DS1 ports to Auto Enable. The User Account Management table is also reset to default.

3-36 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - Utilities

Load All Default Settings

This option defaults all settings for the unit. Once the settings have been successfully retrieved, Command Accepted will appear at the bottom of the screen

CAUTION

The User Account Management table is also reset to default.

Updating Software

Select Update Flash Software from the Utilities menu to update software, using either XModem protocol or TFTP.

NOTE

Before beginning update of Flash software, disable the Auto Save feature of the MX2800. From the Configuration menu, choose System

Management , then select Auto Save and toggle until it is set to Disable .

Update Via XModem

Updating the Flash Software via XModem requires that a VT100 terminal menu session be active through the units craft port. To update the software via XModem, follow these steps:

1. From the MX2800 Main Menu, select Configuration , then Utilities , then Update Flash Software , and then Update via XModem .

2. Once it has been determined where the new binary file is located, select Start to begin the transfer.

3. Once Start has been selected, start the XModem transfer from the terminal menu program that is being used by selecting or typing the file path for the location of the new binary file.

Refer to the appropriate documentation for the terminal emulator to begin XModem transfer.

4. After the binary file has been selected, the XModem transfer will begin. To cancel a transfer in progress, press C TRL +X three times. The ACT LED on the active card is solid amber for the duration of XModem transfer. The ACT LED on the standby card is flashing green.

5. If updating a unit with redundant controller cards, the active controller will begin uploading the new code to the standby controller after the XModem transfer has completed and the unit has successfully loaded and programmed the new software into its

Flash memory. If the unit does not have redundant controller cards, go to Step 7 .

6. While the standby card is having code uploaded, the ACT LED on the standby card will be solid amber. After the code has finished uploading to the standby card, the card will reset itself and begin running the new code.

61200290L1-1H 3-37

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

CAUTION

The standby card must remain in place until the upload process is complete and the ACT LED is no longer solid amber and returns to flashing green. Removing the standby card during the uploading process will corrupt the software.

7. The system must be manually reset after downloading new software for the active controller card to begin running the new code. From the Utilities menu, select System

Reset , then select either Immediate Reset to immediately reset the system or Schedule Reset

Time to set a time for the system to reset. Once the system has been reset, the new software will be running.

NOTE

This function is available only when updating the software through the craft port.

Update Via TFTP Server

Updating the FLASH Software via TFTP Server requires that the IP address and file name of file to be downloaded be known. To update the software via TFTP, follow the steps below:

1. Select Update via TFTP Server from the Utilities menu. A new menu displays, allowing the IP address and file name of the file to be downloaded to the unit to be entered. Once this information is entered, select Start/Stop Transfer .

2. After the binary file is selected, the TFTP transfer will begin. To cancel a transfer in progress, press C TRL +X three times. The ACT LED on the active card is solid amber for the duration of TFTP transfer. The ACT LED on the standby card is blinking green.

3. If updating a unit with redundant controller cards, the active controller begins uploading the new code to the standby controller after the XModem transfer has completed; and the unit has successfully loaded and programmed the new software into its FLASH memory. If the unit does not have redundant controller cards, go to Step 5 .

4. While the standby card is having code uploaded, the ACT LED on the standby card will be solid amber. After the code has finished uploading to the standby card, the card will reset itself and begin running the new code.

CAUTION

The standby card must remain in place until the upload process is complete, and the ACT LED is no longer solid amber. Removing the standby card during the uploading process will corrupt the software.

3-38 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - Utilities

5. The system must be manually reset after downloading new software for the active controller card to begin running the new code. From the Utilities menu, select System

Reset

Time

. Then select either Immediate Reset to immediately reset the system or Schedule Reset

to set a time for the system to reset. Once the system has been reset, the new software will be running.

NOTE

After new software has been downloaded to the MX2800 system, a condition known as a “software version mismatch” exists on the active card. The currently running software version is different from the version of the new software that was just programmed into the card's nonvolatile memory. This condition occurs because a manual card reset is necessary for the card to begin running the new software. If the software version being run by the system before the upgrade began was 2.00 or higher, this mismatch will be indicated by a TL1 standing condition (condition code PROGFLT) and a repeating message displayed at the bottom of all menu screens. This is not a service-affecting condition; however, it is recommended that the download process be completed by resetting the active card as soon as it is practical. Doing so assures that all improvements in the new software are fully available.

Configuration Transfer

Select Config Transfer from the Utilities menu to transfer files to and from a TFTP server. The

Config Transfer option is used to save the MX2800 configuration as a backup file, ensuring that the same configuration can be used with multiple MX2800 units. Only one configuration transfer session (upload or download) can be active at a time.

NOTE

Before using Config Transfer, the MX2800 should have a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway (if required) and should be connected to an Ethernet network.

Saving to a TFTP Server

To save current configuration information to a TFTP server, follow the steps listed below:

1. Set the Server IP Address field to the IP address of the machine running the TFTP server program.

If the ADTRAN TFTP server is being used, the IP address displays in the Server IP Address field. For other TFTP servers, refer to the appropriate documentation.

2. Change the TFTP Server Filename to a unique filename. This will be the name of the configuration file saved to the remote server.

61200290L1-1H 3-39

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

NOTE

Some TFTP servers constrain the format of the filename, depending on the operating system of the server. For example, a TFTP server running on a PC under Windows 3.1 may permit only 8.3 format filenames (8 characters, period, and three extension characters).

3. Select Save Config Remotely .

Retrieving from a TFTP Server

To retrieve current configuration information from a TFTP server, follow the steps listed below:

1. Set the Server IP Address field to the IP address of the machine running the TFTP server program.

If the ADTRAN TFTP server is being used, the IP address displays in the Server IP Address field. For other TFTP servers, please refer to the appropriate documentation.

2. Change the TFTP Server File Name to a unique filename, including the complete path.

This will be the name of the configuration file retrieved from the remote server.

CAUTION

Configuration changes will not be implemented until all Telnet sessions are closed. Loading a new configuration may disrupt data traffic.

3. Select Load and Use Config .

NOTE

IP address and management port settings remain unchanged when a configurative is retrieved from a TFTP server.

Resetting the System

The system must be manually reset after downloading new software. When the unit has successfully loaded and programmed the new software into its FLASH memory, it will begin uploading the code to the standby controller. This will be indicated on the menu and the ACT

LED on the standby card will display solid yellow.

CAUTION

The standby card must remain in place until the process is complete and the ACT LED is no longer solid yellow. Removing the standby card during the uploading process will corrupt the software.

3-40 61200290L1-1H

Section 3, Configuration - Save Configuration and Alarm Log

Once the upload is complete, the standby card will self-reset and begin running the new code.

However, the active card does not reset automatically. The unit must be reset through the

Immediate Reset or S chedule Reset Time functions.

SAVE CONFIGURATION AND ALARM LOG

Commits the current configuration and alarm log to nonvolatile memory. If this option is not selected after making changes to the configuration, the unit reverts to its previous configuration when powered down. When the selection is made, a response is displayed on the Save

Configuration and Alarm menu. See

Figure 3-18 .

Figure 3-18. Indication of a Saved Configuration and Alarm Log

61200290L1-1H 3-41

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

3-42 61200290L1-1H

Section 4

Status

INTRODUCTION

View MX2800 status information by selecting Status from the Main Menu. The information for

the DS3, DS2s, T1/E1 lines, power supplies, and controller cards is provided. See Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1. Status Menu

DS3 STATE

This field displays the current state of the DS3. The following subsections describe the DS3 status fields in detail.

Rx Framing

This field shows the network framing type (C-Bit or M13).

61200290L1-1H 4-1

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

State

This field displays the current condition of the network. Possible conditions are listed in

Table

4-1 .

Condition

Normal

Alarm

In Test

Table 4-1. Network State Conditions

Description

The MX2800 is ready to pass data.

The unit is currently receiving an alarm indication. For alarm types, refer

to the “Alarm” on page 4-2 subsection.

The unit is currently in test mode. Refer to

“Section 6, Loopbacks”

for information on the test type.

Alarm

This field displays the current alarm condition of the MX2800. Possible conditions are given in

Table 4-2 .

Condition

Normal

RAI

LOS

AIS

LOF

XCV

TLOS

Idle

Table 4-2. Alarm Conditions

Description

No alarms are currently being received.

The unit is receiving an RAI (yellow) alarm from the network. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bits

(X1 and X2) are set to zero.

The unit has lost the Rx signal.

The unit is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network. AIS alarms occur when consecutive 1010s are received in the information bits, indicating that there is a transmission fault located either at or upstream from the transmitting terminal.

The unit detects a framing loss from the network.

The unit is receiving excessive code violations from the network, exceeding the threshold set by the user. For more information, refer to

“XCV Threshold” on page 3-13.

The transmitter has failed.

The unit detects an idle sequence from the network.

4-2 61200290L1-1H

Section 4, Status - DS3 State

Remote

This field indicates the current state of the remote MX2800 (available with C-Bit framing only).

Possible conditions are given in Table 4-3

.

Condition

Normal

RAI

LOS

AIS

LOF

Idle

DS3 Eqpt Fail (SA)

DS3 Eqpt Fail (NSA)

Common Eqpt Fail

(NSA)

Multiple DS1 LOS

Single DS1 LOS

DS1 Eqpt Fail (SA)

DS1 Eqpt Fail (NSA)

Unknown

Table 4-3. Remote Alarm Conditions

Description

The far-end MX2800 is not reporting any alarm conditions.

The far-end unit is receiving an RAI (yellow) alarm from the network. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit.

The X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to zero.

The far-end unit has lost the Rx signal.

The far-end unit is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network. AIS alarms occur when consecutive 1010s are received in the information bits, indicating that there is a transmission fault located either at or upstream from the transmitting terminal.

The far-end unit detects a framing loss from the network.

The far-end unit detects an idle sequence from the network.

The far-end unit or network is reporting a service-affecting DS3 equipment failure.

The far-end unit or network is reporting a non-service-affecting DS3 equipment failure.

The far-end unit or network is reporting a non-service-affecting common equipment failure.

The far-end unit is experiencing a loss of signal on multiple DS1s.

The far-end unit is experiencing a loss of signal on a single DS1.

The far-end unit is experiencing a service-affecting DS1 equipment failure.

The far-end unit is experiencing a non-service-affecting DS1 equipment failure.

The unit is unable to discern the status of the far-end unit. (Normal for

M13 framing.)

61200290L1-1H 4-3

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

POWER SUPPLY STATE

This field indicates which types of power supplies are installed (AC or DC) in Card A and Card

B and gives their current state. See

Table 4-4

.

Condition

Normal

Error

Power Low

Power Fail

Charger Fail

Battery Low

Temp High

Temp Critical

Table 4-4. Power Supply Conditions

Description

The power supply is fully operational.

The controller card cannot communicate with the power supply.

The power supply output level is abnormally low.

The power supply input power is lost.

The battery backup charger has failed or has lost its AC input.

The battery backup has reached an insufficient energy level to power the unit.

The power supply card temperature is abnormally high.

The power supply card temperature is so high that it is approaching shut off.

SYSTEM STATE

These fields display information regarding the two controller cards. The following sections describe the system state fields in detail.

Alarm

This field displays what type (if any) of system alarm is currently recognized by the unit. The condition is displayed until it clears up, with the exception of the Switched condition (which is cleared manually) and the Excessive Switches (which is cleared when Protection Switch

alarms counts are cleared). For more information, refer to “Protection Switch Statistics” on page 5-13.

To clear the Switched condition, select Acknowledge Alarms (ACO) or push the ACO button on the front

panel. For more information, refer to “ACO Buttons” on page 2-15 and

“Acknowledge Alarms

(ACO)”

on page 4-7 in this section. Possible alarm types are listed in Table 4-5 .

Condition

Supply Failure

Card Failure

Excessive Switches

Switched

Table 4-5. System State Alarm Types

Description

A power supply card has failed.

A controller card is not passing data.

The Max Switching Threshold has been exceeded. Refer to

“Maximum

Switch Threshold” on page 3-6.

A card switch has occurred.

4-4 61200290L1-1H

Section 4, Status - System State

Card A/Card B

These fields display the current state of the two controller cards. Possible states for the

controller cards are listed in Table 4-6

.

Condition

Not Installed

Standby

Active

Failure

Table 4-6. Controller Card States

Description

No controller card is installed in this slot.

The controller card is ready to pass data but is currently acting as a backup card.

The controller card is acting as the primary card.

The controller card has failed and needs to be replaced.

Protection

This field lists the type of protection mode currently active. Possible states are listed in Table

4-7

.

Condition

Network

Circuit

None

Table 4-7. Protection Types

Description

Both controller cards are installed and everything is healthy. The unit is in full network protection mode.

Unit is in Circuit Protection Mode and everything is healthy, or unit is in network protection mode and a failure is present on the network.

One controller card is installed, or the unit is in Circuit Protection Mode, and the secondary card has failed.

NOTE

For more information on the various types of Protection Modes,

refer to “Section 7, Circuit and Network Redundancy” .

61200290L1-1H 4-5

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Card Comm

This field displays the current state of the communication link between the two controller cards.

• OK indicates that the cards are communicating

• Failure indicates that the cards are not able to communicate with each other

• If there is only one card installed, Non-Redundant is displayed

DS2 STATE

This field displays the current state of each of the seven DS2s. Possible states are listed in

Table 4-8 .

Condition

OK

LOF

RAI

AIS

Table 4-8. DS2 States

Description

The DS2 is not receiving alarms.

The unit detects framing loss across the DS2.

The unit is receiving an RAI (yellow) alarm across the DS2. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bit is set to zero.

The unit is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network across the DS2. AIS alarms occur when the unit receives unframed all ones.

T1/E1 STATE

This field displays the current state of the individual T1s or E1s. Possible states are listed in

Table 4-9 .

Condition

OK

LOS

XCV

TST

HOT

LAIS

CAIS

Table 4-9. T1/E1 States

Description

The T1/E1 is ready to pass data.

The unit has lost the Rx signal on the T1/E1.

The unit is receiving excessive code violations across the T1/E1, exceeding the configured threshold (refer to

“XCV Threshold” on page 3-13).

The T1/E1 is currently in test mode.

The T1/E1 transceiver temperature is too high.

The T1 is receiving all ones from the DSX-1 interface.

The T1 is receiving all ones from the DS3 side of the network.

4-6 61200290L1-1H

Section 4, Status - Acknowledge Alarms (ACO)

NOTE

A DS2 can be divided into either three E1s or four T1s. Therefore, when dealing with an E1 configuration, some of the fields in the T1/

E1 State menus do not apply (and display nothing).

ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS (ACO)

This selection is used to remotely turn off an active alarm. It is the software equivalent of the

ACO button as described in

“ACO Buttons” on page 2-15.

61200290L1-1H 4-7

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

4-8 61200290L1-1H

Section 5

Statistics

INTRODUCTION

To access Statistics menu, select Statistics

from the Main Menu. See Figure 5-1 . Alarm infor-

mation and performance parameters are available for both the near and far ends of the network. Information is also given for the individual DS2s and T1/E1 lines.

VIEWING STATISTICAL INFORMATION

Statistical information is given in screens based on these time periods:

• The current 15-minute interval

• A 24-hour history (divided into 96 15-minute intervals)

• The totals for the previous 24 hours

• A cumulative alarm count is given (this count continues indefinitely until reset by the user)

61200290L1-1H

Figure 5-1. Statistics Menu

5-1

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

DS3 Statistics

The DS3 Statistics menu, see Figure 5-2 , provides submenus for alarm history and perfor-

mance parameters.

Figure 5-2. DS3 Statistics Menu

24 Hour Alarm History

The MX2800 keeps track of alarms for both the near and far ends of the network. View alarm history information in one of the three time period selections, or view a cumulative alarm count. Information in these fields is for the given time period since the last reset. The cumulative alarm count continues indefinitely until Clear All DS3 Alarm Counts is selected.

See Table 5-1

for a list of alarm counts. See Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4 for examples of alarm

screens.

Condition

LOS

LOF

AIS

RAI

IDLE

Table 5-1. Alarm Counts

Description

Number of times the unit has lost the receive signal.

Number of times the unit has detected a loss of framing from the network.

Number of times the unit has received an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network. AIS alarms occur when consecutive 1010s are received in the information bits. This indicates that there is a transmission fault located either at or upstream from the transmitting terminal.

Number of times the unit has received an RAI (yellow) alarm from the network. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to zero.

Number of times the unit has detected an idle sequence from the network.

5-2 61200290L1-1H

Section 5, Statistics - Viewing Statistical Information

NOTE

The count given reflects the number of times the alarm or state has occurred rather than the number of seconds the alarm was active.

Figure 5-3. DS3 Current 15 Minute Alarm Count Screen

61200290L1-1H

Figure 5-4. DS3 24-Hour Alarm History Screen

5-3

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

NOTE

When a > or < symbol appears in the upper corner of the screen, use the right and left arrow keys on the keyboard to scroll right or left to view additional information. See the upper right-hand corner of

Figure 5-4 .

Performance Parameters

View performance parameter information for the network in one of the three time period selections. Information in these fields is for the given time period since the last reset. When viewing the 24-hour history statistics screen, use the left and right arrow keys to scroll through all 96

15-minute intervals. See Figure 5-6 through

Figure 5-10 for examples of the performance

parameter screens.

Descriptions of the fields in each screen follow.

5-4

Figure 5-5. DS3 Performance Parameters (Current 15 Minutes) - Page 1

61200290L1-1H

Section 5, Statistics - Viewing Statistical Information

Figure 5-6. DS3 Performance Parameters (Current 15 Minutes) - Page 2

NOTE

When an UP or DOWN indicator appears in the corner of the screen, use the up and down arrow keys on the keyboard to scroll the information.

Figure 5-7. DS3 Performance Parameters (24 Hour History) - Page 1

61200290L1-1H 5-5

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Figure 5-8. DS3 Performance Parameters (24 Hour History) - Page 2

5-6

Figure 5-9. DS3 Performance Parameters (Totals) - Page 1

61200290L1-1H

Section 5, Statistics - Viewing Statistical Information

Figure 5-10. DS3 Performance Parameters (Totals) - Page 2

Interval starting at:

This field is the beginning of the 15-minute interval. This field is displayed only in the 24-hour history screen, which gives information for the previous 24 hours divided into 15-minute

intervals, as shown in Figure 5-8 on page 5-6

.

Unavailable Seconds (UAS)

This field is the time in seconds that the network port has been unavailable for data delivery.

The T3 link is down or in test or the signaling state is down.

Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS)

This field indicates the number of seconds with one or more out-of-frame defects or a detected incoming AIS.

Line Coding Violation (LCV)

This field is the number of bipolar violations (BPVs) and excessive zeros (EXZs) that have occurred.

Line Errored Seconds (LES)

This field is the number of seconds in which one or more CVs or one or more LOS defects occurred.

P-Bit Errored Seconds (PES)

This field indicates the number of seconds with one or more P-Bit Coding Violations (PCVs), one or more out-of-frame defects, or a detected incoming AIS. This count is not incremented when UASs are counted.

61200290L1-1H 5-7

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

P-Bit Severely Errored Seconds (PSES)

This field is the number of seconds with 44 or more PCVs, one or more out-of-frame defects, or a detected incoming AIS. This count is not incremented when UASs are counted.

P-Bit Coding Violations (PCV)

This field is the number of coding violation (CV) error events that have occurred.

C-Bit Code Violations (CCV)

In C-Bit parity mode, this is a count of coding violations reported via the C-Bits or the number of C-Bit parity errors that have occurred.

C-Bit Errored Seconds (CES)

This is the number of seconds with one or more CCVs, one or more out-of-frame defects, or a detected incoming AIS. This count is not incremented when UASs are counted.

C-Bit Severely Errored Seconds (CSES)

This is the number of seconds with 44 or more CCVs, one or more out-of-frame defects, or a detected incoming AIS. This count is not incremented when UASs are counted.

F-Bit Errors (FBE)

This is the number of times an F-bit framing error has occurred.

Far End Block Error (FEBE)

This field indicates the number of times the far-end unit has received a C-parity or framing error.

Clear All Local DS3 Statistics/Refresh All Remote Statistics

Use this option to clear or refresh all current information. These selections affect all statistical information, not just the displayed screen. When viewing the 24-Hour History screen, press the D OWN arrow key to access this selection.

DS2 Statistics

24-Hour Alarm History

The MX2800 keeps track of RAI, OOF, and AIS alarms for each of the seven DS2s. View alarm history information in one of the three time period selections, or view a cumulative alarm count. Information in these fields is for the given time period since the last reset. The cumulative alarm count continues indefinitely until Clear All DS2 Alarm Counts is selected.

When viewing the 24-Hour History menus, use the U P

and D OWN

arrow keys to view all three

alarm counts (RAI, OOF, and AIS). See Figure 5-11

through Figure 5-13

.

5-8 61200290L1-1H

Section 5, Statistics - Viewing Statistical Information

Figure 5-11. DS2 Current 15 Minute Alarm Count Screen

61200290L1-1H

Figure 5-12. DS2 RAI 24-Hour Alarm History - Page 1

5-9

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Figure 5-13. DS2 RAI 24-Hour Alarm History - Page 2

Performance Parameters

The performance parameters screen displays a count of parity bit errors and frame bit errors for the seven DS2s. View this information in any of the three time period selections. Information in these fields is for the given time period since the last reset. When viewing the 24hour history statistics screen, use the L EFT and R IGHT

arrow keys to scroll through all 96 15minute intervals; use the U P

and D OWN

arrow keys to scroll between the PBERR (parity bit error) and FBERR (frame bit error) menus. See

Figure 5-14 through

Figure 5-16 .

5-10

Figure 5-14. DS2 Performance Parameters (Current 15 Minutes)

61200290L1-1H

Section 5, Statistics - Viewing Statistical Information

Figure 5-15. DS2 PBERR 24-Hour Alarm History - Page 1

61200290L1-1H

Figure 5-16. DS2 PBERR 24-Hour Alarm History - Page 2

5-11

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

T1/E1 Statistics

The MX2800 keeps track of the following statistics for each of the T1s and E1s:

• Loss of Signal Alarms

• Line Coding Violations

• AIS Loop Alarms

• AIS Carrier Alarms

• Errored Seconds

• Severely Errored Seconds

See Figure 5-17

. View this information in one of the three time period selections, or view a cumulative alarm count. Information in these fields is for the given time period since the last reset. The cumulative alarm count continues indefinitely until Clear All T1/E1 Alarm Counts, located in each field, is selected.

Performance parameters that are documented for the T1s and E1s are

• Errored Seconds

• Severely Errored Seconds

• Severely Errored Framing Seconds

• Unavailable Seconds

• Degraded Minutes

The current interval, past 24-hours in 15-minute intervals, and 24-hour totals for each of these may be viewed.

5-12

Figure 5-17. T1/E1 Port Local Statistics Menu

61200290L1-1H

Section 5, Statistics - Protection Switch Statistics

PROTECTION SWITCH STATISTICS

This menu provides statistics regarding protection switches. The number of protection

switches that occur within the particular time period are listed. See Figure 5-18

.

Figure 5-18. Protection Switch Statistics Menu

Performance Parameters

View performance parameter information for the network in one of the three time period selections. Information in these fields is for the given time period since the last reset. When viewing the 24-Hour History statistics screen, use the L EFT and R IGHT arrow keys to scroll through all

96 15-minute intervals. Clearing protection switch alarm counts will clear the Excessive

Switch State , if active.

Alarm Log

This menu provides a list of the last 200 alarms that have occurred on the MX2800. When the alarm log becomes full, new alarms replace the oldest alarms in a first-in, first-out sequence.

The alarm log is periodically stored in nonvolatile memory. Once every minute, if an alarm has been recorded or if the alarm log has been reset since the last time it was saved, then the alarm log and system configuration are saved to nonvolatile memory. Both the alarm log and system configuration are saved manually when the user executes the Save Configuration &

Alarm Log menu function in the Configuration menu. Each time the system powers up, the alarm log is retrieved from non-volatile memory.

A Reset Alarm Log function is accessible from the alarm log menu. This option clears the alarm log. See

Figure 5-19 .

61200290L1-1H 5-13

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Figure 5-19. Alarm Log

5-14 61200290L1-1H

Section 6

Loopbacks

INTRODUCTION

The Loopback menu initiates loopback tests from the MX2800.

Figure 6-1 shows the main

Loopback menu. To initiate a loopback, select Loopback Menu.

To locate descriptions of the types of loopback tests that are available, find T1/E1 , DS2 , or DS3

Loopback descriptions .

Next, select by number the type of loopback for a description.

Descriptions and testing diagrams of the loopback tests are provided in the following subsections:

“T1/E1 Loopbacks” on page 6-2

“DS3 Loopbacks” on page 6-6

“DS2 Loopbacks”

61200290L1-1H

Figure 6-1. Loopback Menu

6-1

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

T1/E1 LOOPBACKS

Selecting Data Mode Menu from the Loopback menu brings up the control menu shown in

Figure 6-1 .

If initiating a T1/E1 loopback, select the facility number (1-28). A loopback menu for the facility displays a menu of nine types of loopbacks. See

Figure 6-2

. Select Data Mode to end a loopback test in progress.

Figure 6-2. Loopback Control Menu

Data Mode

Selecting the Data Mode from the Loopback Control menu ends any loopback test in progress.

Tributary

A Tributary loopback loops the selected T1/E1 back to the network (DS3). The T1/E1 is demultiplexed through the M23 and M12/G.747 demultiplexers, looped back, and multiplexed back up through the M12/G.747 and M23 multiplexers. During this loopback, all network receive data is passed to the DSX-1/E1 transmitters, but all data received by the

DSX-1/E1 loop side is ignored and substituted with the network data. See Figure 6-3 for an

illustration of this test.

D

S

3

D

S

3

F

R

A

M

E

R

F

R

A

M

E

R

D

S

2

D

S

2

F

R

A

M

E

R

F

R

A

M

E

R

Figure 6-3. Tributary Loopback Test

6-2 61200290L1-1H

Section 6, Loopbacks - T1/E1 Loopbacks

Analog Network

An Analog Network loopback test loops the selected T1/E1 back to the network (DS3). The T1/

E1 is completely demultiplexed, looped back at the T1/E1 line interface unit (LIU), through the LIU drivers and receivers, and multiplexed back onto the DS3 network stream. See

Figure

6-4 for an illustration of this test.

D

S

3

D

S

3

F

R

A

M

E

R

F

R

A

M

E

R

D

S

2

F

R

A

M

E

R

F

R

A

M

E

R

Figure 6-4. Analog Network Loopback

Digital Line/Net

A Digital Line/Net loopback performs a loopback of the selected T1/E1 in both the network and local loop directions. Both loopbacks occur at the T1/E1 LIU. The network side loopback occurs at the edge of the LIU while the T1/E1 loop side loopback occurs deep into the LIU through the receiver, receive equalizer, transmit jitter attenuator, and the T1/E1 transmit

drivers. See Figure 6-5 for an illustration of this test.

D

S

3

F

R

A

M

E

R

F

R

A

M

E

R

D

S

2

D

S

2

F

R

A

M

E

R

F

R

A

M

E

R

Figure 6-5. Digital Line/Network Loopback

Codec Line/Net

A Codec Line/Net loopback performs a loopback of the selected T1/E1 in both the network and local loop directions. Both loopbacks occur at the T1/E1 codec. Both the network and the local loop side of the loopback are executed at the edge of the codec, completely testing the

M13 MUX and the T1/E1 LIU. See

Figure 6-6

for an illustration of this test.

61200290L1-1H 6-3

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

D

S

3

D

S

3

F

R

A

M

E

R

F

R

A

M

E

R

D

S

2

D

S

2

F

R

A

M

E

R

F

R

A

M

E

R

Figure 6-6. Codec Loopback

Remote Loopback

A Remote Loopback performs a loopback of the selected T1/E1 on the far-end M13 multiplexer. If an MX2800 is located at the far end, an Analog Network Loopback is executed when a Remote Loopback is engaged. This loopback is only available when the DS3 is configured for

C-bit parity framing since it requires the availability of the far-end alarm and control (FEAC) channel. See ANSI T1.107.

CSU Loopback

A CSU Loopback enables the MX2800 to generate a CSU loop up pattern (001001…) toward the T1 CSU attached to the selected T1 line for six seconds. After six seconds have elapsed, the pattern ceases; and incoming network traffic is passed through to the CSU device. If the

CSU device responded to the CSU loop up pattern, it returns all data back toward the network. A loop down pattern (0000100001….) is generated toward the CSU for 6 seconds when Data Mode is selected.

NOTE

When in CSU Loopback , only the Data Mode for the T1 under test may be selected. Selecting any other option will result in an error message.

CSU Loopback w/BERT

A CSU Loopback w/BERT enables the MX2800 to test the local T1 loop to the CSU using the

QRSS pseudorandom bit sequence. When CSU Loopback w/BERT is selected, the MX2800 initiates a CSU loopback toward the CSU attached to the selected T1 line. Six seconds after starting the CSU loop up pattern, the MX2800 ceases sending the CSU loop up pattern and begins sending an unframed QRSS pattern toward the CSU. If the CSU device responded to the CSU loop up pattern, the MX2800 checks the incoming pattern for errors. Additional menu items appear to show the state of pattern synchronization, error count, and a clear error

count option. See Figure 6-7 . Selecting Data Mode will cease the transmission of the QRSS

pattern and start transmission of a loop down pattern as previously described.

6-4 61200290L1-1H

Section 6, Loopbacks - T1/E1 Loopbacks

NOTE

When in CSU Loopback w/BERT, only the Data Mode for the T1 under test may be selected. Selecting any other option results in an error message.

Figure 6-7. Loopback Menu with BERT Selected

Line BERT

A Line BERT enables the MX2800 to perform a “head-to-head” BERT test toward the CSU.

Selecting Line BERT replaces all incoming network traffic for the selected T1 with an unframed

QRSS pattern toward the CSU. When Line BERT is selected, additional menu items appear and show the state of pattern synchronization, cumulative error count, and a clear error count option. Selecting Data Mode ceases QRSS pattern generation and substitution of the incoming data stream.

NOTE

When in Line BERT mode, only the Data Mode option for the T1 under test may be selected. Selecting any other option will result in an error message being displayed.

NOTE

Only one T1 port may engage a CSU Loopback, CSU Loopback w/

BERT, or a Line BERT. If a CSU Loopback, CSU Loopback w/

BERT, or a Line BERT is already active at the time a new CSU

Loopback, CSU Loopback w/BERT, or Line BERT is selected, the former test is terminated, and the latter test is engaged.

61200290L1-1H 6-5

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

DS3 LOOPBACKS

After DS3 Loopback is selected, the menu in

Figure 6-8 appears. The sections following the

figure provide descriptions and illustrations of the testing options. Select Data Mode to end a test in progress.

Figure 6-8. DS3 Loopback Menu

CAUTION

If IP forwarding is enabled, a user should not perform a DS3 Loopback from the menus of the far-end (non-LAN end) MX2800. The communication link is over the DS3. If a loopback is performed, communication will be lost with the far-end MX2800. If this happens and a loopback timeout is not active, the user must cycle power to the far-end MX2800 to cancel the loopback and regain access to the shelf.

6-6 61200290L1-1H

Section 6, Loopbacks - DS3 Loopbacks

Line Loopback

Line Loopback performs a loop of the DS3 back to the network. This loopback occurs just prior to the DS3 framer and B3ZS decoder, but it makes full use of the DS3 LIU in both receive and transmit directions; therefore, any coding violations received by the DS3 will be inserted back into the network without modification. See

Figure 6-9

for an illustration of this test.

NOTE

If a Line loopback is active when the MX2800 is operating in the

Local timing mode, the timing source for the DS3 is effectively removed from the circuit. Therefore, it is up to the test equipment or network to provide DS3 timing into the circuit for the duration of the test.

D

S

3

F

R

A

M

E

R

F

R

A

M

E

R

D

S

2

D

S

2

F

R

A

M

E

R

F

R

A

M

E

R

Figure 6-9. Line Loopback Test

Digital Loopback

A Digital Loopback loops the entire DS3 back to the local loop side. The end effect of this test is a loopback of all T1/E1s after being fully multiplexed and de-multiplexed to and from a

DS3. The incoming DS3 data is ignored, and the outgoing DS3 stream is substituted in its place just prior to exiting the DS3 framer. This test is illustrated in

Figure 6-10

.

D

S

3

D

S

3

F

R

A

M

E

R

F

R

A

M

E

R

D

S

2

F

R

A

M

E

R

F

R

A

M

E

R

Figure 6-10. Digital Loopback

61200290L1-1H 6-7

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Metallic Loopback

A Metallic Loopback test loops the entire DS3 back to the local loop side. The end effect of this test is a loopback of all T1/E1s after being fully multiplexed and de-multiplexed to and from a

DS3 and passed through both directions of the DS3 LIU. During this test, the incoming DS3 is disconnected from the DS3 receiver and the outgoing DS3 signal is substituted in its place.

See Figure 6-11

for an illustration of this test.

NOTE

The DS3 Line Length should be set to Short before performing this loopback.

D

S

3

D

S

3

F

R

A

M

E

R

F

R

A

M

E

R

D

S

2

F

R

A

M

E

R

F

R

A

M

E

R

Figure 6-11. Metallic Loopback Test

Remote Loopback

A Remote Loopback performs a loopback on the far-end M13 multiplexer. This loopback is available only when the DS3 is configured for C-bit parity framing since it requires the availability of the FEAC channel. See ANSI T1.107.

NOTE

Local timing must be selected before initiating this loopback. If necessary, it may be returned after loopback has been cancelled.

Remote All T1/E1

A Remote All T1/E1 loopback performs a loopback of all T1/E1 channels on the far-end M13 multiplexer. If an MX2800 is located at the far end, an Analog Loopback is executed on all active channels simultaneously. The form of this loopback code sent to the far-end will depend on the framing mode being used. When in C-Bit parity mode, the MX2800 will send loopback commands over the FEAC channel. When operating in M13 framing mode, the MX2800 will send C-Bit loopbacks at the DS2 level.

6-8 61200290L1-1H

Section 6, Loopbacks - DS2 Loopbacks

DS2 LOOPBACKS

Once a number has been selected which corresponds with the DS2 to be tested, the DS2 menu in

Figure 6-12

appears. The subsection following the figure provides a description and an illustration of the DS2 Network loopback testing option. Select the appropriate DS2 Data

Mode to end a test in progress.

Figure 6-12. DS2 Loopback Menu

DS2 Network

A DS2 Network loopback test loops the selected DS2 back to the network (DS3) prior to being passed through the M12/G.747 de-multiplexer. All T1/E1s attached to that DS2 will receive data normally, but all data inserted into the T1/E1s attached to the selected DS2 will be ignored and replaced by the incoming DS2 network data. This test is illustrated in

Figure 6-

13

.

D

S

3

D

S

3

F

R

A

M

E

R

F

R

A

M

E

R

D

S

2

D

S

2

F

R

A

M

E

R

F

R

A

M

E

R

Figure 6-13. DS2 Network Loopback Test

61200290L1-1H 6-9

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

6-10 61200290L1-1H

Section 7

Circuit and Network Redundancy

INTRODUCTION

The MX2800 provides backup measures of protection for circuit failure. The following subsections describe the possible modes of operation:

“Nonredundant Mode” on page 7-2 offers no backup protection

“Circuit Failure Recovery Mode” on page 7-3 furnishes backup protection in the event of

controller card failure

“Circuit and Network Failure Recovery Mode” on page 7-4 provides the most complete mode

of circuit and network protection.

The descriptions given include illustrations and suggested configuration settings.

NOTE

The settings may need modification based on your network configuration.

61200290L1-1H 7-1

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

NONREDUNDANT MODE

In Nonredundant Mode, the MX2800 houses only one controller card. There is no failure protection. In the event of a failure, an alarm is initiated and the front panel LEDs reflect the condition. See

Figure 7-1 for an illustration.

Figure 7-1. Nonredundant Mode

NOTE

In this mode, the DS3 must be connected to the IN and OUT jacks for DS3 A.

7-2 61200290L1-1H

Section 7, Circuit and Network Redundancy - Circuit Failure Recovery Mode

CIRCUIT FAILURE RECOVERY MODE

In Circuit Failure Recovery Mode, two controller cards are installed with an incoming single

DS3 line. See

Figure 7-2

. In this mode, the MX2800 can continue operating in the event of a controller card failure. When both cards are healthy, the primary card actively processes data while the secondary card stands by and is ready to take over if the first fails. The secondary card continuously monitors the line and remains framed to the incoming signal.

NOTE

During a card switch, service interruption occurs on both the DS3 and the DSX1 connections. However, since the secondary controller card remains framed to the incoming signal at all times, it is a minimal interruption.

Figure 7-2. Circuit Failure Recovery Mode

See Table 7-1

for a list of this mode’s configuration requirements.

Table 7-1. Configuration Requirements for Circuit Recovery

Selection Path

Config > Network Interface > XCV Threshold

Recommended Setting

1E-3 *

Config > Network Interface > Network Protection

Config > Network Interface > Max. Switch Threshold

Config > Network Interface > Min. Switching Period

Disabled

3

10 seconds

Config > T1/E1 Interface > T1/E1 Circuit Protection Enable all or select theT1/E1s that redundant switching should occur on.

Config > T1/E1 Interface > XCV Threshold 1E-3

* This is a critical alarm only when Inactive Card is not installed or is not working.

61200290L1-1H 7-3

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

CIRCUIT AND NETWORK FAILURE RECOVERY MODE

In this mode, two controller cards are installed and connected to two individual DS3 lines.

This is the most complete mode of redundancy. In this mode, the primary controller card is connected to the primary DS3 line and the secondary controller card is connected to the secondary DS3 line. The primary card and line actively transmit data, while the other card and line stand by ready to take over if the first card and line fail.

A feature of the MX2800 is its ability to internally re-route the network connection if a controller card and the opposite network connection fail. For example, in the illustration given

in Figure 7-3 , failed DS3 A is connected to healthy Card A and healthy DS3 B is connected to

failed Card B. In a case like this, the MX2800 is able to automatically re-route DS3 B to Card

A.

The configuration requirements for this mode are the same as the ones given for

“Circuit

Failure Recovery Mode” on page 7-3 except for the Network Protection setting, which must be

set to Enable.

Figure 7-3. Circuit and Network Failure Recovery Mode

7-4 61200290L1-1H

Section 8

Power Loss Recovery

INTRODUCTION

The MX2800 provides backup measures of protection for both power supply and power source failure. The following subsections describe the possible modes of operation:

“Nonredundant Power Mode” on page 8-1 offers no backup protection

“Power Supply Recovery Mode” on page 8-2 furnishes backup protection in the event of

power supply card failure

“Power Supply and Source Recovery Mode” on page 8-3 provides a backup system for both

card and source failure

“Battery Backup Mode” on page 8-4 offers battery backup in the event of a power outage

NONREDUNDANT POWER MODE

In Nonredundant Power Mode, the MX2800 houses only one power supply card; and only one power source is available. There is no power failure protection. If a power supply card fails, the

unit is down until the card is repaired or replaced. See Figure 8-1

for an illustration.

MX2800

61200290L1-1H

Figure 8-1. Nonredundant Power Mode

NOTE

Power supplies are hot-swappable.

8-1

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

POWER SUPPLY RECOVERY MODE

In Power Supply Recovery Mode, two power supply cards are installed and connected to a single power source. See

Figure 8-2

. In this mode, the MX2800 continues operation in the event of a power supply failure without interrupting service. The power supplies are load sharing, so either power supply can provide power for the entire unit.

NOTE

When the unit is configured with dual internal AC power supplies, this is the only power supply protection mode available.

MX2800

Figure 8-2. Power Supply Failure Recovery Mode

8-2 61200290L1-1H

Section 8, Power Loss Recovery - Power Supply and Source Recovery Mode

POWER SUPPLY AND SOURCE RECOVERY MODE

In this mode, two power supply cards are installed and are connected to two individual power sources. The MX2800 handles any combination of power source or power supply failure.

Much like the backup design for the controller cards, the MX2800 is able to internally re-route the power source if a power supply card and the opposite power source fail. For example, in

Figure 8-3

, failed Power Source A is connected to healthy Card A , and healthy Power Source B is connected to failed Card B. In a case like this, the MX2800 automatically connects Power

Source B to Card A.

NOTE

This configuration is available only with DC power supplies.

Figure 8-3. Power Supply and Source Failure Recovery Mode

61200290L1-1H 8-3

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

BATTERY BACKUP MODE

With the installation of the ADTRAN Power Supply/Battery Charger (PS/BC) and backup battery pack, the MX2800 can continue operation without service interruption in the event of a power outage. This PS/BC (P/N 4175043L2 and P/N 4175043G2) provides –48 VDC to the

MX2800. It receives 115 VAC through a standard plug and wall socket.

The PS/BC maintains the battery at peak charge (–48 VDC) at all times. If AC power is lost, the unit automatically supplies power from the battery without interrupting service. When AC power returns, the unit switches back to AC power and recharges the battery. For installation instructions, refer to the guide provided with the PS/BC. See

Figure 8-4 for an illustration of

this setup.

NOTE

The MX2800 can operate on a fully charged battery for 4 hours without recharging.

L

A

N

M

O

D

E

M

NONCRITICAL

NO COM NC

CRITICAL

OUT

DS3/STS-1

A

IN

B

MX2800

DSX-1/E1

(OUT)

DSX-1/E1

(IN)

DC POWER

PWR

FAIL

B

RET

PWR

FAIL

-48V 0.7A

RET

A

T R

CLK

A

S T R

CLK

B

S

115 AC 50/60Hz

0.8A

Magnified View

PWR

FAIL

-

RET

PWR

FAIL

-

RET

AC Power Input

AC/DC Power Supply

Battery Charging Unit

P/N 1175043Lx

-48 VDC

Backup Battery Pack

P/N 1175044L1

Battery Charger

Power Cable

Figure 8-4. Battery Backup System

8-4 61200290L1-1H

Section 9

Transaction Language 1 (TL1)

INTRODUCTION

Transaction Language 1 (TL1) is a Bellcore standard used in the input and output messages that pass between Operations Systems (OS) and Network Elements (NE) in telecommunication networks. It was developed to standardize equipment surveillance and memory administration and to test with a common format.

This release of TL1 primarily supports the interactive and autonomous retrieval of system events as part of a valid TL1 session.

OVERVIEW

TL1 is an ASCII-based language that supports both command-response and autonomous (NE) message generation. Commonly, TL1 is used over an X.25 packet network but is completely independent of any physical layer protocols. For the MX2800, TL1 is implemented as a Telnet session or “RAW TCP” session running over either Ethernet or PPP.

To successfully initiate a TL1 session, the unit must be properly configured for an Ethernet

(LAN) or PPP connection. A valid IP address, gateway address, and subnet mask are required.

Refer to

“System Management” on page 3-14. User authentication is also required. An account

must be set up before initiating a TL1 session.

An account may be set up via the VT100 menus (Configuration/System Management/System

Security/User Account Management.) An account includes a username, password, and privileges. The privileges are as follows:

• Admin privileges allow the user to use all supported commands.

• Guest privileges allow the user only to activate the TL1 session, cancel a TL1 session, and retrieve specific system information.

• Interface privileges allow the user to use all supported commands except modifying the user account information, setting the MX2800 date and time, configuring alarm relays, and operating loopbacks.

• Test privileges allow the user to use all supported commands except modifying the user account information, configuring alarm relays, and setting the MX2800 date and time.

The TL1 account privileges are detailed in Table 9-1 .

61200290L1-1H 9-1

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

TL1 Command

ACT-USER

ALW-MSG-rr

CANC-USER

DLT-USER-SECU

ED-USER-SECU

ED-rr (related to loopbacks)

ED-rr (configuring alarm relays)

ED-rr (all remaining)

ENT-USER-SECU

INH-MSG-rr

OPR-LPBK

REPT-STAT

RLS-LPBK

RTRV-ALM-rr

RTRV-COND-rr

RTRV-HDR

RTRV-rr

RTRV-SYS

RTRV-USER-SECU

RTRV-VER

SET-DAT

Table 9-1. TL1 Account Privileges

Guest

X

X

X

Interface

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Test

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Admin

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

To bring up a TL1 Telnet connection (up to eight may be active), a Telnet client requests a connection on TCP port 3116 (port 2024 is used for “RAW TCP” socket access). Once the

Telnet connection is established, it is necessary to initiate a TL1 session. Establishing a TL1 session involves successful user authentication. Until a TL1 session is established, all commands other than those used to initiate or terminate a session are denied. Autonomous messaging is also disabled. For information on using the Act-User command to initiate a TL1 session, refer to

“TL1 Commands” on page 9-6.

9-2 61200290L1-1H

Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1) - TL1 Messages

NOTE

If RADIUS authentication is enabled, refer to

“RADIUS

Authentication” on page 3-25, the MX2800 attempts to use

RADIUS to authenticate TL1 users. If the RADIUS server presents a login challenge which requires a response, then the TL1 user reenters the ACT-USER command, supplying the appropriate response as the password. Challenges and other reply messages returned from the RADIUS server are displayed as comments in the response message from the MX2800.

TL1 MESSAGES

As stated earlier, TL1 messages are either part of a command-response exchange or are generated autonomously. A TL1 command has the general format as follows:

<verb>[-<mod1>[-<mod2>]]:<tid>:<aid>:<ctag>:<general block>:<keyword block>:

<state block>;

Refer to

“TL1 Commands” on page 9-6 for a list of TL1 commands supported by the MX2800.

TL1 Responses

There are three types of TL1 responses:

• Acknowledgment messages

• Output Response messages

• Autonomous messages

Acknowledgment Messages

Acknowledgment messages are brief output messages generated in response to received TL1 commands. The MX2800 currently supports two types of acknowledgment messages:

• In Progress (IP)

• All Right (OK)

In Progress

The IP acknowledgment message is usually generated as an interim response message to indicate that a message has been received and the command is being executed. IP messages have the following general format:

IP <ctag><cr><lf>

<

61200290L1-1H 9-3

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

All Right

The OK acknowledgment message indicates that a command has been received, and the required action was initiated and completed. This message has the following general format:

OK <ctag><cr><lf>

<

Output Response Messages

Output Response messages are generated in response to received commands. Output

Response Messages have the following general format:

<cr><lf><lf>

^^^<tid>^<yr>-<mo>-<day>^<hr>:<min>:<sec><cr><lf>

M^^<ctag>^<completion code><cr><lf>

^^^<errcode><cr><lf>;

For the MX2800, the Completion Code field contains one of the following values:

• Comply indicates a successful execution of the received command.

• Deny indicates denial of the received command.

When the received command is denied, the line in the message following the Completion Code

line contains a four letter error code. Refer to TL1 Error Codes on page 9-16 for an indication

of the possible MX2800 error codes.

The MX2800 specifically uses quoted line(s) in the response message of successfully executed

RTRV-ALM commands. The quoted line format is as follows:

<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>…

The NTFCNCDE field contains one of the following values:

• MN - Minor

• MJ - Major

• CR - Critical

See the condition types listed in Table 9-3 on page 9-12 for possible MX2800

CONDTYPE codes.

Autonomous Messages

The Autonomous message is sent from the NE to the OS and is not associated with any explicit input message. The MX2800 uses this message to exclusively report alarmed and nonalarmed events. An autonomous message has the following general format:

<cr><lf><lf>

^^^<tid>^<yr>-<mo>-<day>^<hr>:<min>:<sec><cr><lf>

<alarm code>^<atag>^<verb>[^<mod1>[^mod2>]]<cr><lf>

^^^”<aid>:<message parameters>”<cr><lf>;

9-4 61200290L1-1H

Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1) - TL1 Messages

Possible values for the Alarm Code field include the following:

• *C - Critical Alarm

• ** - Major Alarm

• * - Minor Alarm

• A - Non-alarm

• Null - (blank)

The MX2800 specifically uses quoted line(s) in REPT-ALM and REPT-EVT Autonomous messages.

The REPT-ALM message has the following quoted line format:

<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>…

The NTFCNCDE field contains one of the following values:

• CL indicates alarm cleared.

• TC indicates transient condition.

• MN indicates minor.

• MJ indicates major.

• CR indicates critical.

The REPT-EVT message has the following quoted line format:

<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condeff>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>…

The CONDEFF field will contain one of the following values:

• CL indicates standing condition cleared.

• SC indicates standing condition raised.

• TC indicates transient condition.

For possible CONDTYPE codes for both REPT-ALM and REPT-EVT quoted lines, see the

condition types listed in Table 9-3 on page 9-12 and

Table 9-4 on page 9-15, respectively.

Refer to the section

“TL1 Autonomous Messages” on page 9-11 for a list of Autonomous

messages currently supported by the MX2800.

61200290L1-1H 9-5

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

TL1 COMMANDS

As stated in

“TL1 Messages” on page 9-3, the general format for a TL1 command is as follows:

<verb>[-<mod1>[-<mod2>]]:<tid>:<aid>:<ctag>:<general block>:<keyword block>:

<state block>;

Areas of concentration for TL1 support in the MX2800 include session initiation, session termination, and system event reporting.

Table 9-2

lists the commands currently supported by the MX2800.

NOTE

The Target ID (tid) is the same as the Unit ID. Refer to the “Unit ID” on page 3-33.

Table 9-2. TL1 Commands

ACT-USER:<tid>:<username>:<ctag>::<password>;

Description Initiates a TL1 session

TID

AID

Target ID

Username (must be present in the User Account Management table)

CTAG*

PARAM1

Transaction Number (integer)

Password for associated username

ALW-MSG-{EQPT|rr|ALL}:<tid>::<ctag>;

Description Allows the transmission of the requested autonomous alarm(s)

MOD2

TID

CTAG*

Specifies what entity type to allow:

• EQPT

• rr

• ALL

General Equipment Unit

Facility or Circuit (i.e. T1, T2, T3)

All entity types

Target ID

Transaction Number (integer)

PARAM1* Specifies what notification code to allow:

• MN minor

• MJ

• CR

• ALL major critical all notification codes

CANC-USER:<tid>::<ctag>;

Description Terminates a TL1 session

TID

AID*

CTAG*

Target ID

Username (must be present in the User Account Management table)

Transaction Number (integer)

9-6 61200290L1-1H

Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1) - TL1 Commands

Table 9-2. TL1 Commands (Continued)

ED-USER-SECU:<tid>:<username>:<ctag>::,<password>,,<privileges>;

Description

TID

AID

CTAG*

PARAM2

PARAM4

Edits the requested user’s account

Target ID

Username

Transaction Number (integer)

User’s new password

User’s new privileges:

• 0 disabled

• 1

• 2 guest interface

• 4

• 8 test admin

ENT-USER-SECU:<tid>:<username>:<ctag>::<password>,,<privileges>;

Description Adds the requested user to the User Account Management table

TID

AID

Target ID

Username

CTAG*

PARAM1

Transaction Number (integer)

User’s password

PARAM3 User’s privileges:

• 0

• 1 disabled guest

• 2

• 4

• 8 interface test admin

DLT-USER-SECU:<tid>:<username>:<ctag>;

Description

TID

AID

CTAG*

Removes the requested user from the User Account Management table

Target ID

Username

Transaction Number (integer)

61200290L1-1H 9-7

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Table 9-2. TL1 Commands (Continued)

INH-MSG-{EQPT|rr|ALL}:<tid>::<ctag>:<ntfcncde>;

Description

MOD2

TID

CTAG*

PARAM1*

Inhibits the transmission of the requested autonomous alarm(s)

Specifies what entity type to inhibit:

• EQPT General Equipment Unit

• rr

• ALL

Facility or Circuit (i.e. T1, T2, T3)

All entity types

Target ID

Transaction Number (integer)

Specifies what notification code to inhibit:

• MN

• MJ minor major

• CR

• ALL critical all notification codes

RTRV-HDR:<tid>::<ctag>;

Description Replies with a normal “COMPLD” response

TID

CTAG*

Target ID

Transaction Number (integer)

RTRV-VER:<tid>::<ctag>;

Description Retrieves the current software revision

TID

CTAG*

Target ID

Transaction Number (integer)

RTRV-SYS:<tid>::<ctag>;

Description Retrieves the system identifier string

TID

CTAG*

Target ID

Transaction Number (integer)

RTRV-USER-SECU:<tid>::<ctag>;

Description Retrieves the current list of users from the TL1 users table

TID

CTAG*

Target ID

Transaction Number (integer)

9-8 61200290L1-1H

Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1) - TL1 Commands

Table 9-2. TL1 Commands (Continued)

RTRV-ALM-{EQPT|rr|ALL}:<tid>::<ctag>;

Description

MOD2

TID

AID*

CTAG*

Retrieves the requested alarm status

Specifies what entity type to query:

• EQPT General Equipment Unit

• rr

• ALL

Facility or Circuit (i.e. T1, T2, T3)

All entity types

Target ID

Identifies the component to which the desired alarm pertains. Identifiers are integers and are dependent on the entity specified in “MOD2” as follows: for EQPT:

401 Generic

402

403

404

405

ALL

Control Card A

Control Card B

Power Supply A

Power Supply B all EQPT identifiers (default selection) for T1:

101

102

.

128

ALL

DS1#1

DS1#2

DS1#28 all DS1 circuits (default selection) for T2:

201

202

.

207

ALL

DS2#1

DS2#2

DS2#7 all DS2 circuits (default selection) for T3:

301

302

303

ALL

DS3#1

DS3 (Control Card A)

DS3 (Control Card B) all DS3 circuits (default selection) for ALL: x

ALL specific identifier (e.g. 1, 28, etc.) all identifiers (default selection)

Transaction Number (integer)

61200290L1-1H 9-9

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Table 9-2. TL1 Commands (Continued)

RTRV-COND-{EQPT|rr|ALL}:<tid>::<ctag>;

Description

MOD2

TID

AID*

CTAG*

Retrieves the requested alarms and conditions

Specifies what entity type to query:

• EQPT General Equipment Unit

• rr

• ALL

Facility or Circuit (i.e. T1, VT1, STS1)

All entity types

Target ID

Identifies the component to which the desired alarm pertains. Identifiers are integers and are dependent on the entity specified in “MOD2” as follows: for EQPT:

401 Generic

402

403

404

405

ALL

Control Card A

Control Card B

Power Supply A

Power Supply B all EQPT identifiers (default selection) for T1:

101

102

.

128

ALL

DS1#1

DS1#2

DS1#28 all DS1 circuits (default selection) for T2:

201

202

.

207

ALL

DS2#1

DS2#2

DS2#7 all DS2 circuits (default selection) for T3:

301

302

303

ALL

DS3#1

DS3 (Control Card A)

DS3 (Control Card B) all DS3 circuits (default selection) for ALL: x

ALL specific identifier (e.g. 1, 28, etc.) all identifiers (default selection)

Transaction Number (integer)

9-10 61200290L1-1H

Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1) - TL1 Commands

Table 9-2. TL1 Commands (Continued)

SET-DAT:<tid>::<ctag>::<YY-MM-DD>,<HH-MM-SS>;

Description

PARAM1

Sets the date and time

Date in YY-MM-DD format

PARAM2 Time in HH-MM-SS format

* An asterisk indicates optional command blocks.

TL1 Autonomous Messages

Autonomous messages provide a mechanism for real time reporting of system events.

Although most events reported are alarms, some events are only informational. The Verb,

Mod1, and Mod2 parameters of the message indicate what type of event has occurred.

NOTE

The default setting for Autonomous message reporting is OFF .

Follow these steps to enable Autonomous message reporting:

• If it has not already been done, initiate a TL1 session by following the setup procedures and using the ACT-USER command.

• Use the ALW-MSG command to enable autonomous messaging. This command is described in

Table 9-2 .

REPT-ALM indicates an alarm event.

Table 9-3

lists possible autonomous messages for alarm events and includes recommended actions to take. REPT-EVT indicates an informational

event. Table 9-4

lists possible autonomous messages for informational events

61200290L1-1H 9-11

REPT

ALM

T1

REPT

ALM

T2

REPT

ALM

T3

AID

101-128

101-128

201-207

201-207

301

301

301

301

301

301

301

301

301

301

301

301

302

(CTRL A)

303

(CTRL B)

Notification

Code

MN

MJ

MJ

Condition

Type

ACTLPBK

LOS

OOF

MJ

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

CR

RAI

TSA

EXT-DS3

LOS

OOF

AIS

ISD

EXT-DS3

EXT

LOS-M

EXT-DS1

LOS-S

EXT-DS1

LOS

Service

Affecting

SA

SA

SA

SA

SA

SA

SA

SA

SA

SA

NSA

NSA

SA

SA

SA

NSA

SA

Table 9-3. MX2800 Alarm Events

Location Description Recommended Action

NEND

NEND

NEND

FEND

NEND

FEND

FEND

FEND

FEND

FEND

FEND

FEND

FEND

FEND

FEND

FEND

NEND

DS1 In-test

Loss Of Signal

DS2 Out Of Frame

FEND Single DS1 Loss of

Signal

FEND DS1 Equipment

Failure NSA

DS3 Loss Of Signal

No action. (This alarm is normal during DS1 loopback tests).

Check DS1 facility entering MX2800 for valid signal.

Check for DS3 alarms. If none, check settings at far-end M13 multiplexer.

Check status Of DS2 at far-end M13 multiplexer.

DS2 Remote Alarm

Indication

DS3 in-test

FEND DS3 Equipment failure SA

No action (This alarm is normal during DS3 loopback tests.)

Examine far-end M13 multiplexer to determine the reason it has signaled this condition.

FEND DS3 Loss of Signal Check DS3 facility entering the far-end M13 multiplexer.

FEND DS3 Out of Frame Check DS3 facility entering the far-end M13 multiplexer

(including checking the provisioned DS3 framing type).

Check status of DS3 at far-end M13 multiplexer.

FEND DS3 Alarm

Indication Signal

FEND DS3 Idle

FEND DS3 Equipment

Failure NSA

FEND Common

Equipment Failure

FEND Multiple DS1 Loss of Signal

FEND DS1 Equipment

Failure SA

Check for DS3 idle signal at far-end M13 multiplexer.

Examine far-end M13 multiplexer to determine the reason it has signaled this condition.

Examine far-end M13 multiplexer to determine the reason it has signaled this condition.

Check for loss of signal at DS1 ports on far-end M13 multiplexer.

Examine far-end M13 multiplexer to determine the reason it has signaled this condition.

Check for loss of signal at DS1 ports on far-end M13 multiplexer.

Examine far-end M13 multiplexer to determine the reason it has signaled this condition.

Check DS3 facility entering the MX2800 for a valid signal.

REPT

ALM

T3

REPT

ALM

EQPT

AID

402

(CTRL A)

403

(CTRL B)

402

(CTRL A)

403

(CTRL B)

402

(CTRL A)

403

(CTRL B)

404 (PS A)

405 (PS B)

404 (PS A)

405 (PS B)

302

(CTRL A)

303

(CTRL B)

302

(CTRL A)

303

(CTRL B)

302

(CTRL A)

303

(CTRL B)

401

(GENERAL

)

Notification

Code

CR

Condition

Type

OOF

Table 9-3. MX2800 Alarm Events (Continued)

Location Description Recommended Action Service

Affecting

SA NEND DS3 Out Of Frame Check The provisioning of the DS3 framing type (M13 OR

C-Bit) to make sure it matches the facility. If this is correct, check the DS3 facility entering the MX2800 for valid DS3 framing.

MJ

MN

MN

MN

CR

MN

MN

MN

RAI

ISD

CTNEQPT

CTNEQPT

TRMT

PROTNA

PWR

MISC

SA

SA

NSA

NSA

SA

NSA

NSA

NSA

FEND

FEND

NEND

NEND

NEND

NEND

NEND

NEND

DS3 Remote Alarm

Indication

DS3 idle

Controller

Communication Failure

Controller Card Failure

Ds3 Transmit Loss Of

Signal

Power Supply

Communication Failure

Check the far-end M13 multiplexer and any intermediate devices for reasons why they might be sending DS3 idle toward the MX2800.

Check the standby card for proper LED behavior (and replace if necessary). If no problem is found, call ADTRAN Technical

Support for further troubleshooting details.

Replace the card which reports failure (should be indicated by a flashing red ACT LED and the AID of the alarm).

Controller Card Removed Check to see if card was removed or reset by on-site personnel.

Power Supply Failure

Check the DS3 facility entering the far-end M13 multiplexer for AIS or severely-errored frames.

Replace the card for which TLOS is reported. Use the aid of the alarm to identify the card.

Replace the failed power supply. Use the aid of the alarm to identify the card.

Replace the failed power supply. Use the aid of the alarm to identify the card.

REPT

ALM

EQPT

AID

404 (PS A)

405 (PS B)

404 (PS A)

405 (PS B)

404 (PS A)

405 (PS B)

404 (PS A)

405 (PS B)

404 (PS A)

405 (PS B)

Notification

Code

MN

Condition

Type

PWR-5

Table 9-3. MX2800 Alarm Events (Continued)

Location Description Recommended Action Service

Affecting

NSA NEND Power Supply Low Replace the failed power supply. Use the aid of the alarm to identify the card.

MN

MJ

MN

MN

HITEMP

HITEMP

PWR-48

PROTNA

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

NEND

NEND

NEND

NEND

Power Supply Temp High Reduce the temperature of the MX2800's operating environment or provide better ventilation.

Power Supply Temp

Critical

Power Supply Source

Failure

Power Supply Card

Removed

Reduce the temperature of the MX2800's operating environment or provide better ventilation.

Check the –48 volt input indicated by the AID for a blown fuse or disconnected/incorrect wiring.

Check to see if card was removed by on-site personnel.

REPT

EVT T1

REPT

EVT T2

REPT

EVT T3

REPT

EVT

EQPT

REPT

EVT

EQPT

AID

101-128

101-128

101-128

201-207

302

(CTRL A)

303

(CTRL B)

302

(CTRL A)

303

(CTRL B)

401

(GENERAL)

401

(GENERAL)

402

CTRL A

403

CTRL B

Notification

Code

EVT

EVT

EVT

EVT

EVT

Condition

Type

BPV

AIS

AISUONE

S

AIS

AIS

Table 9-4. MX2800 Informational Events

Location Description Recommended Action Service

Affecting

NSA NEND Excessive DS1 Bipolar

Violation

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

FEND

FEND

FEND

FEND

DS1 Line AIS (LAIS)

DS1 Carrier AIS (CAIS)

DS2 AIS

DS3 Alarm Indication

Signal

Make sure the line coding (B8ZS/AMI) is provisioned correctly for this DS1 facility. Check the DS1 facility entering the MX2800 for impairments which may cause line code violations.

Check the status of this DS1 signal toward the MX2800 at each DS1 device (for example, an intermediate device which sees LOS on the DS1 toward the MX2800 may transmit AIS toward the MX2800 in response).

If there are no DS3 or DS2 alarms reported, check the status of the DS1 facility entering the far-end M13 multiplexer. For example, if the far end M13 multiplexer detects LOS on the

DS1 facility, it will send DS1 AIS over the DS3 toward the

MX2800.

Check status of DS2 at the far-end M13 multiplexer.

Check the status of the DS3 signal toward the MX2800 at each DS3 device. (For example, an intermediate device which sees LOS or LOF on the DS3 toward the MX2800 may transmit AIS toward the MX2800 in response.)

EVT

EVT

EVT

EVT

BPV

WKSWPR

ESW

PROGFLT

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

NEND

NEND

NEND

NEND

Excessive DS3 Bipolar

Violation

Protection Switch

Excessive Protection

Switch

Software Version

Mismatch

Check DS3 facility entering the MX2800 for problems which may produce bipolar violations.

If protection switch was not performed manually, check for other alarms indicating the failure which caused the switch.

If protection switches were not performed manually, check for other alarms indicating the failure(s) which caused the switches.

Reset the reported card so the new software can take effect.

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

TL1 ERROR CODES

When the MX2800 denies a received TL1 command, the Output Response message has an associated four letter error code indicating the reason for denial.

Table 9-5 lists possible error

codes.

Error Code

ICNV

IDRG

IIAC

IITA

IPNV

PIUI

PLNA

SROF

SSRE

Table 9-5. TL1 Error Codes

Description

Input, Command Not Valid

Input, Date Range

Input, Invalid Access Identifier

Input, Invalid Target Identifier

Input, Parameter Not Valid

Privilege, Input User Not Valid

Privilege, Login Not Active or Insufficient Privileges

Status, Requested Operation Failed

Status, System Resources Exceeded

TL1 Editing

TL1 editing commands allow the MX2800 to be provisioned through a TL1 session rather than through the menu system that is accessed using a VT100 terminal emulator. User account information must be provisioned through a console menu session or TL1 session prior to initiating a TL1 session. Once a TL1 session has been initiated using the ACT-USER command, see

Table 9-2 , the TL1 editing commands may be used. The standard format for an edit

command is as follows:

ED-rr:<tid>:<aid>:<ctag>:::<keyword>=<value>;

The parameter descriptions are as follows:

• rr is T1, T2, T3, or EQPT

• <tid> is the Target Identifier

• <aid> is the Access Identifier

• <ctag> is a 1-to-6 character correlation tag (echoed in response)

• <keyword> is one of the entries from the data dictionaries in Table 9-6 ,

Table 9-7

,

Table 9-8

, or Table 9-9

.

• <value> is one of the enumerated types in the data dictionaries, an integer, or Y/N, depending on the TYPE.

9-16 61200290L1-1H

Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1) - TL1 Error Codes

NOTE

<aid> and <ctag> are optional parameter. The placemarker: must remain in place. The default <aid> is All. The default <ctag> is 1.

TL1 Editing Examples:

ED-T1:UNIT-1:106:1:::LBO=133TO266; (This would edit line build out for T1 #6 to be 133 to

266.)

ED-T2:UNIT-1:205:2:::DS2CFGMODE=T1; (This would configure T2 #5 for T1 mode versus

E1.)

ED-T3:UNIT-1:300:3:::DS3MAXNUMSW=3; (This would set maximum number of switches for controller cards to 3.)

ED-EQPT:UNIT-1:400:4:::PSTEMPCRITRLY=Y; (This would enable the alarm relay for power supply temperature critical.)

To view the value of a parameter, a retrieve (RTRV) command is used. The standard format for the RTRV command is as follows:

RTRV-rr:<tid>:<aid>:<ctag>:::<keyword>;

The parameter descriptions are as follows:

• rr is T1, T2, T3, or EQPT

• <tid> is the Target Identifier

• <aid> is the Access Identifier

• <ctag> is a 1 to 6 character correlation tag (echoed in response)

• <keyword> is one of the entries from the data dictionaries in Table 9-6 ,

Table 9-7

,

Table 9-8

, or Table 9-9

.

NOTE

<aid> and <ctag> are optional parameter. The placemarker : must remain in place. The default <aid> is All. The default <ctag> is 1.

TL1 RTRV examples:

RTRV-R1::109:4; (This would return the values for all parameters related to T1 #9.)

NOTE

If no parameter is specified, all valid parameters to the <aid> are retrieved.

RTRV-T1:UNIT-1:106:1:::LBO; (This would return the value of line build out for T1 #6.)

RTRV-T2:UNIT-1:205:2:::DS2CFGMODE; (This would return the configuration mode of T2 #5.)

61200290L1-1H 9-17

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

RTRV-T3:UNIT-1:300:3:::DS3MAXNUMSW; (This would return the setting for the maximum number of switches for controller cards.)

RTRV-EQPT:UNIT-1:400:5:::PSTEMPCRITRLY; (This would return the status of the alarm relay for power supply temperature critical.)

Data Dictionaries

The data dictionaries that follow are to be used while performing TL1 editing or retrieve commands. Each data dictionary contains four columns. The columns are as follows:

• Keyword gives the values to be placed in the <keyword> portion of the edit command.

• Type describes the type of <value> that is required to be entered in the edit command.

– ENUM requires a text and/or number string to be entered as the <value>.

– Y/N requires a Y or N representing yes or no to be entered as the <value>.

– INT requires that an integer be entered as the <value>.

• Domain describes valid entries that may be entered into the <value> portion of the edit command.

• Description explains each of the edit or retrieve commands.

Table 9-6 contains entries that are used to edit or retrieve options for the DS3 portion of the

MX2800. When performing TL1 edit commands from this table, the value of rr should be T3, and the <aid> value should be one of the following:

• 300 for all DS3 Circuits

• 301 for DS3 #1

• 302 for DS3 Control Card A

• 303 for DS3 Control Card B

9-18 61200290L1-1H

Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1) - TL1 Error Codes

Keyword

ACTIVECONTROLLER

CARDSWRLY

DIAGDS3

DS3AISRLY

DS3CVTHRS

DS3LOFRLY

DS3LOSRLY

Table 9-6. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS3

Type Domain

ENUM One of the following:

• A

• B

Y/N Y or [N]

ENUM One of the following:

• DATAMODE

• LINELPBK

• DIGLPBK

• METLPBK

• REMLPBK

• ALLT1

Y/N

ENUM One of the following:

• Disable

• 1E3

• 1E4

• 1E5

• 1E6

Y/N

Y/N

Y or [N]

Y or [N]

Y or [N]

Description

Selects which controller card is active

• controller card A is active

• controller card B is active

Identifies status of System Protection

Switch alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Enables the selected DS3 loopback

• Refer to “Data Mode” on page 6-2

• Refer to

“Line Loopback” on page 6-

7

• Refer to “Digital Loopback” on page 6-7

• Refer to “Metallic Loopback” on page 6-8

• Refer to “Remote Loopback” on page 6-8

• Refer to “Remote All T1/E1” on page 6-8

Identifies status of DS3 AIS alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Indicates a limit on the number of code violations accepted by the unit over the

DS3 before the unit switches controller cards

• 1E3 - 1 out of every 1,000 bits contains a CV

• 1E4 - 1 out of every 10,000 bits contains a CV

• 1E5 - 1 out of every 100,000 bits contains a CV

• 1E6 - 1 out of every 1,000,000 bits contains a CV

Identifies status of DS3 LOF alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies status of DS3 LOS alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

61200290L1-1H 9-19

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Table 9-6. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS3 (Continued)

Keyword

DS3MAXNUMSW

DS3MINSWPERIOD

DS3PROT

DS3RAIRLY

DS3TLOSRLY

DS3XCVRLY

FMT

LINELEN

RMTLPBK

Type

INT

INT

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

Domain

0, 1, 2, ..., N

0, 1, 2, ..., N

Y or [N]

Y or [N]

Y or [N]

Y or [N]

ENUM One of the following:

• CBIT

• M13

ENUM One of the following:

• LONG

• SHORT

ENUM One of the following:

• DISABLE

• EITHER

• FEAC

• CBIT

Description

Maximum number of times per hour the unit is allowed to switch between controller cards. If number is exceeded, the unit will issue a trap

Number of seconds that must pass after a protection switch before another protection switch will be allowed

Identifies status of DS3 protection switching

• Yes (Y) - enables DS3 protection switching

• No (N) - disables DS3 protection switching

Identifies status of DS3 RAI alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies status of DS3 TLOS alarm relay

Yes (Y) - enables alarm

No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies status of DS3 XCV alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Sets framing format to match the format of the receive signal at the network interface

• The framing format s set to CBIT

• The framing format is set to M13

Identifies Network DS3 line length

• LONG - exceeds 50 feet.

• SHORT - less than 50 feet.

Indicates whether the unit will respond to remote loopbacks over FEAC, CBIT,

EITHER, or if remote loopbacks are disabled

• DISABLE - do not respond

• EITHER - respond over either FEAC or CBIT

• FEAC - respond over FEAC

• CBIT - respond over CBIT

9-20 61200290L1-1H

Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1) - TL1 Error Codes

Keyword

SYSCARDARLY

SYSCARDBRLY

SYSCARDCOMMRLY

SYSCARDRLY

TMG

Table 9-6. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS3 (Continued)

Type

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

Domain

Y or [N]

Y or [N]

Y or [N]

Y or [N]

ENUM One of the following:

• LPD

• INT

Description

Identifies status of System Controller

Card A alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies status of System Controller

Card B alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies status of System

Communication Fail alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies status of System Controller

Card alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies timing supply for the DS3

• LPD - loop timed

• INT - internal timing source

Table 9-7 contains entries that are used to edit or retrieve options for the DS2 portion of the

MX2800. When performing TL1 edit commands from this table, the value of rr should be T2 and the <aid> value should be one of the following:

201 - DS2#1

202 - DS2#2

.

.

.

207 - DS2#7

61200290L1-1H 9-21

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Keyword

DIAGDS2TESTSTATE

DS2AISRLY

DS2CFGMODE

DS2LOSRLY

DS2RAIRLY

Table 9-7. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS2

Type Domain

ENUM One of the following:

• DATAMODE

• NETWORK

Y/N

ENUM One of the following:

• T1

• E1

Y/N

Y/N

Y or [N]

Y or [N]

Y or [N

Description

Identifies DS2 Diagnostic Loopback

• NETWORK selects the available loopback

• DATAMODE ends a test in progress

Identifies status of DS2 AIS alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies DS2 Configuration

• T1 sets DS2 configuration to M12

(4xT1).

• E1 sets DS2 configuration to G.747

(3xE1).

Identifies status of DS2 LOS alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies status of DS2 RAI alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Table 9-8 contains entries that are used to edit or retrieve options for the DSX portion of the

MX2800. When performing TL1 edit commands from this table, the value of rr should be T1, and the <aid> value should be one of the following:

101 - DS1#1

102 - DS1#2

.

.

.

128 - DS1#28

9-22 61200290L1-1H

Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1) - TL1 Error Codes

Keyword

DIAGDSXTESTSTATE

DSXCAISRLY

Table 9-8. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS1

DSXCFGLINESWPROT

DSXCFGSTATE

Type Domain

ENUM One of the following:

• DATAMODE

• TRIBUTARY

• ANALOGNET

• DIGNET

• CODEC

• REMLPBK

• CSULPBK

• CSUBERT

• LINEBERT

Y/N Y or [N]

ENUM One of the following:

• DISABLE

• ENABLE

• UNAVAIL

ENUM One of the following:

• DISABLE

• ENABLE

• UNAVAIL

• AUTO

Description

Identifies DSX Diagnostic Loopbacks.

Choose an available loopback

• Refer to

“Data Mode” on page 6-2

• Refer to

“Tributary” on page 6-2

• Refer to

“Analog Network” on page 6-3

• Refer to

“Digital Line/Net” on page 6-3

• Refer to

“Codec Line/Net” on page 6-3

• Refer to

“Remote Loopback” on page 6-4

• Refer to

“CSU Loopback” on page 6-4

• Refer to

“CSU Loopback w/BERT” on page 6-4

• Refer to

“Line BERT” on page 6-5

Identifies status of DSX CAIS alarm relay.

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies the state of the DSX Switch

Protection

• DISABLE - the switch is disabled

• ENABLE - the switch is enabled

• UNAVAIL - the switch is not in the configuration

Identifies the DSX configuration state

• DISABLE - disables the current configuration

• ENABLE - enable the newest configuration

• UNAVAIL - the configuration is unavailable

• AUTO - the configuration is set to auto save in nonvolatile memory

61200290L1-1H 9-23

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Keyword

DSXCVTHRS

DSXLAISRLY

DSXLOSRLY

Table 9-8. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS1 (Continued)

DSXLBKDETECTION

DSXPROTTHRS

Type Domain

ENUM One of the following:

• DISABLE

• 1E3

• 1E4

• 1E5

• 1E6

Y/N

ENUM One of the following:

• DISABLE

• CSU

• NIU

• M13INBAND

• UNAVAIL

Y/N

INT

Y or [N]

Y or [N]

1-28

Description

Indicates a limit on the number of code violations accepted by the unit over a single T1/E1 before the unit switches controller cards

• 1E3 - 1 out of every 1,000 bits on a single T1/E1 contains a CV

• 1E4 - 1 out of every 10,000 bits on a single T1/E1 contains a CV

• 1E5 - 1 out of every 100,000 bits on a single T1/E1 contains a CV

• 1E6 - 1 out of every 1,000,000 bits on a single T1/E1 contains a CV

Identifies status of DSX LAIS alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies for each T1/E1 interface whether the T1/E1 will respond to loopback requests

• DISABLE - does not respond to loopback tests

• CSU - cause the channel to loop up or loop down when it receives a

CSU loop-up or loop-down pattern for more than 5 seconds

• NIU - cause the channel to loop up or loop down when it receives an

NIU loop-up or loop-down pattern for more than 5 seconds

• M13INBAND - cause the channel to loop up or loop down when it receives an M13INBAND loop-up or loop-down pattern for more than 5 seconds

• UNAVAIL - T1/E1 not available for loopback tests

Identifies status of DSX LOS alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Number of Enabled lines that must fail before a protection switch occurs

9-24 61200290L1-1H

Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1) - TL1 Error Codes

Keyword

DSXXCVRLY

LBO

LINECDE

Table 9-8. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS1 (Continued)

Type

Y/N

Domain

Y or [N]

ENUM One of the following:

• 0TO133

• 133TO266

• 266TO399

• 399TO533

• 533TO655

• MINUS7R5

• E10TO3000

• UNAVAIL

ENUM One of the following:

• AMI

• B8ZS

• E1AMI

• E1HDB3

• UNAVAIL

Description

Identifies status of DSX XCV alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies the line length for each T1 interface according to the distance from the MX2800 to the DTE device

• 0TO133, 133TO266, 266TO399,

399TO533, 533TO655 - distance in feet

• MINUS7R5 - -7.5dB length

• E10TO3000 - setting for E1

• UNAVAIL - unavailable

Identifies line code for T1/E1s to match connected devices

• AMI - set T1 to AMI

• B8ZS - Sets T1 to B8ZS

• E1AMI - sets E1 to AMI

• E1HDB3 - sets E1 to HDB3

• UNAVAIL - no T1/E1 available

Table 9-9

contains entries that are used to edit or retrieve options for the equipment portion of the MX2800. When performing TL1 edit commands from this table, the value of rr should be

EQPT, and the <aid> value should be one of the following:

400 - All EQPT identifiers

401 - Generic

402 - Control Card A

403 - Control Card B

404 - Power Supply A

405 - Power Supply B

61200290L1-1H 9-25

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Keyword Type

DIAGBERCLEARCOUNT Y/N

DIAGBERTCOUNT

DIAGBERTSYNC

DIAGLPBKTIMEOUT

DIAGRESET

PSBATTERYLOWRLY

Table 9-9. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for EQPT

PSCHARGERFAILRLY

INT 0, 1, 2, ..., N

ENUM One of the following:

• NOSYNC

• SYNC

ENUM One of the following:

• DISABLE

• 1-MIN

• 5-MINL

• 10-MIN

• 15-MIN

• 30-MIN

• 45-MIN

• 1-HR

• 2-HR

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

Y or [N]

Domain

Y or [N]

Y or [N]

Y or [N]

Description

Clears BERT count

• Yes (Y) - clears the BERT count

• No (N) - does not clear the BERT count

Error count

Identifies state of Pattern

Synchronization

• NOSYNC - there is no pattern sync

• SYNC - pattern sync is available

Identifies the amount of time before a

Diagnostic Loopback will time out

• DISABLE - timeout is disabled

• 1-MIN - timeout value is one minute

• 5-MINL - timeout value is five minutes

• 10-MIN - timeout value is ten minutes

• 15-MIN - timeout value is 15 minutes

• 30-MIN - timeout value is 30 minutes

• 45-MIN - timeout value is 45 minutes

• 1-HR - timeout value is 60 minutes

• 2-HR - timeout value is 120 minutes

Resets Diagnostic Loopbacks

• Yes (Y) - reset the diagnostic loopback

• No (N) - do not reset the diagnostic loopback

Identifies status of Power Supply

Battery Low alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies status of Power Supply

Charger Fail alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

9-26 61200290L1-1H

Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1) - TL1 Error Codes

Table 9-9. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for EQPT (Continued)

Keyword

PSFANFAILRLY

PSMALFNCRLY

PSPOWERFAILRLY

PSPOWERLOWRLY

PSTEMPCRITRLY

PSTEMPHIGHRLY

Type

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

Y or [N]

Domain

Y or [N]

Y or [N]

Y or [N]

Y or [N]

Y or [N]

Description

Identifies status of Power Supply Fan

Fail alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies status of Power Supply

Malfunction alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies status of Power Supply Power

Fail alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies status of Power Supply Power

Low alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies status of Power Supply

Temperature Critical alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

Identifies status of Power Supply

Temperature High alarm relay

• Yes (Y) - enables alarm

• No (N) - disables alarm

61200290L1-1H 9-27

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

TL1 Loopback Commands

The OPR-LPBK and RLS-LPBK commands are provided as an alternative to ED commands to perform loopbacks through TL1. The general format for these commands is as follows:

OPR-LPBK-{T1|T2|T3}:<tid>:<aid>:<ctag>::<locn>,,,<lpbktype>;

RLS-LPBK-{T1|T2|T3}:<tid>:<aid>:<ctag>::<locn>,,,<lpbktype>;

Table 9-10

describes each of the DS3 loopbacks that can be initiated or released with these commands.

Table 9-10. DS3 TL1 Loopback Commands

RLS

OPR

RLS

OPR

Verb

OPR

RLS

OPR

MOD2

T3

T3

T3

T3

T3

T3

T3

<aid> *

3xy

3xy

3xy

3xy

3xy

3xy

3xy

RLS

OPR

T3

T3

3xy

3xy

FEND

FEND

RLS T3 3xy FEND

RLS T3 3xy

* The value of xy may be 00 through 03.

<locn>

NEND

NEND

NEND

NEND

NEND

NEND

FEND

<lpbktype>

LINE

LINE

DIGLPBK

DIGLPBK

TERMINAL

TERMINAL

LINE

LINE

ALLT1

ALLT1

Description

Initiates the DS3 Line Loopback

Releases the DS3 Line Loopback

Initiates the DS3 Digital Loopback

Releases the DS3 Digital Loopback

Initiates the DS3 Network Loopback

Releases the DS3 Network Loopback

Initiates the DS3 Remote Loopback

Releases the DS3 Remote LoopbacK

Initiates the DS3 All T1/E1 Loopback

Releases the DS3 All T1/E1 Loopback

Releases any active DS3 Loopback

Table 9-11

describes each of the DS2 loopbacks that can be initiated or released with these commands.

Table 9-11. DS2 TL1 Loopback Commands

Verb MOD2 <aid> * <locn> <lpbktype> Description

OPR

RLS

T2

T2

2xy

2xy

NEND

NEND

NETWORK

NETWORK

Initiates the DS2 Network Loopback

Releases the DS2 Network Loopback

RLS T2 2xy Releases any active DS2 Loopback

* The value of xy may be 01 through 07, corresponding to the desired DS2 channel.

9-28 61200290L1-1H

Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1) - TL1 Error Codes

Table 9-12

describes each of the DS1 loopbacks that can be initiated or released with DS1 TL1 loopback commands.

Table 9-12. DS1 TL1 Loopback Commands

Verb

OPR

RLS

OPR

RLS

OPR

RLS

MOD2

T1

T1

T1

T1

T1

T1

<aid> *

1xy

1xy

1xy

1xy

1xy

1xy

<locn>

NEND

NEND

NEND

NEND

NEND

NEND

<lpbktype>

NETWORK

NETWORK

TERMINAL

TERMINAL

DIGNET

DIGNET

Description

Initiates the DS1 Tributary Loopback

Releases the DS1 Tributary Loopback

Initiates the DS1 Analog Loopback

Releases the DS1 Analog Loopback

Initiates the DS1 Digital Line/Net Loopback

Releases the DS1 Digital Line/Net

Loopback

OPR

RLS

OPR

RLS

T1

T1

T1

T1

1xy

1xy

1xy

1xy

NEND

NEND

FEND

FEND

CODEC

CODEC

DS1FEAC

DS1FEAC

Initiates the DS1 Codec Line/Net Loopback

Releases the DS1 Codec Line/Net Loopback

Initiates the DS1 Remote Loopback

Releases the DS1 Remote Loopback

OPR

RLS

OPR

RLS

T1

T1

T1

T1

1xy

1xy

1xy

1xy

FEND

FEND

FEND

FEND

CSULPBK

CSULPBK

CSUBERT

CSUBERT

Initiates the DS1 CSU Loopback

Releases the DS1 CSU Loopback

Initiates the DS1 CSU Loopback w/BERT

Releases the DS1 CSU Loopback w/BERT

RLS Releases any active DS1 Loopback

* The value of xy may be 01 through 28, corresponding to the desired DS1 channel.

61200290L1-1H 9-29

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

9-30 61200290L1-1H

Appendix A

Acceptance Test Procedure

INTRODUCTION

This appendix describes the procedures to be used in performing acceptance testing of

ADTRAN’s Total Access MX2800 M13 Multiplexer. It is assumed that the MX2800 has already been installed, powered-up, equipped and cabled to the DSX-1 and DSX-3 or connecting

equipment according to the specifications described in “Section 2, Installation and Operation”

and local operating company procedures.

The MX2800 is an M13 multiplexer used to consolidate 28 DS1 circuits on to a DS3. The unit can be equipped in various ways. In general, this section addresses the following areas:

• Verifying the options installed on the unit

• Configuring the unit for test

• Testing all DS1 and DS3 circuits to make sure that each circuit passes error free data

• Verifying that alarms are generated and passed to external alarm systems

• Testing the system power supply and controller card redundancy

• Restoring the unit to the desired configuration

• Configuring the unit for customer traffic

• Completing the Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) Checklist

VERIFYING THE INSTALLED OPTIONS

The installed configuration determines the level of redundancy the unit supports. There may be one or two Power Supply Units (PSUs) and Controller Card Units (CCUs) present. A single

PSU and CCU are required for operation without redundancy. Equipping the shelf with two of each provides full redundancy. The PSUs are the smaller modules on the left side. The CCUs are the larger modules toward the center and right of the shelf. Note which cards are installed

in the chassis under test in Table A-1

.

61200290L1-1H A-1

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Table A-1. Module Install Checklist

If this card is installed...

Power Supply A (far left slot) installed?

Power Supply B (next slot to right) installed

Controller A (lower controller card) installed

Controller A (upper controller card) installed

Check

CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM

Before the required tests can be performed, a minimal amount of configuration must be performed on the MX2800. It is necessary to gain access to the Provisioning menus through the Craft Port, then set the desired parameters for the DS1 ports, the DS3 port, and the alarm attributes. The following paragraphs step through the process.

Accessing the Craft Port

The MX2800 is shipped with a flat silver-satin cable that plugs into the Craft jack on the front panel and a DB-9 adapter that allows the cable to plug into the COM port on a computer or dumb terminal. Make these connections, then start up a terminal emulation program on a computer (e.g., HyperTerminal, Procomm, Crosstalk, etc.), using VT100 emulation with a character format of 9600 baud, no parity, eight bits, and one stop bit. Press the E NTER

key several times. A username prompt should appear. The default username is “username”. The default password is “password”. The input characters for username and password are not case sensitive. After the logon and password are accepted, the MX2800 Main Menu should appear. This is the screen from which all other management and control functions are accessible.

Provisioning the DS3 Port

In order for the MX2800 to correctly pass traffic through the system, the DS3 and DS1 ports need to be properly configured. The provisioning of the DS3 port is covered in this subsection, and the provisioning of the DS1 ports is covered in the next.

NOTE

The E NTER

key is used to select a function, and the E SC

key is used to back up a level in the menu system.

Follow these procedures to configure DS3 ports.

1. From the Main Menu, select Configuration , and then select Network Interface . The Network

Configuration screen should appear. Set each of the options on this screen as referenced below.

A-2 61200290L1-1H

Appendix A, Acceptance Test Procedure

NOTE

To change an option, simply enter the corresponding number, press E NTER ,

and follow the prompts.

DS3 Configuration

• Framing = C-Bit (default = M13)

• Line Length = Use 0-225 ft. (default) or 225-450 ft., depending on the distance to the DS3

Cross connect panel or connecting equipment.

• Timing = Local (default = Loop)

NOTE

When performing tests to a DS3 loopback, the timing must be set to Local to guarantee DS3 frame synchronization and error-free testing during bit error tests. Normal operation generally requires that this attribute be set back to Loop (system default) after all acceptance tests are completed. One exception to the rule is when connecting two MX2800s together on a back-to-back basis (DS3s facing one another). In that case, one MX2800 must be set to Local and the other to Loop .

• Remote Loopbacks = FEAC/C-Bit (default)

• XCV Threshold = Disabled (default)

Protection Configuration

• Active Controller = A (default)

• Network Protection = Disabled (default)

• Max Switch Threshold = 3 (default)

• Min. Switching Period (sec.) = 10 (default)

Miscellaneous

• Loopback Time Ou t = 5 min. (default)

DS2 Configuration

• DS2 #1 = M12(4xT1)

• DS2 #2 = M12(4xT1)

• DS2 #3 = M12(4xT1)

• DS2 #4 = M12(4xT1)

• DS2 #5 = M12(4xT1)

61200290L1-1H A-3

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

• DS2 #6 = M12(4xT1)

• DS2 #7 = M12(4xT1)

NOTE

For additional information about the previous configuration, refer to

“Network Interface” on page 3-4.

2. Press the E SC

key to get back to the main Configuration menu.

Provisioning the DS1 Ports

1. From the main Configuration menu, select T1/E1 Interface . The Configure T1/E1 Interface menu should appear. Since there are 28 DS1 ports to configure and all of them need to be set identically during acceptance testing, the Set Multiple provisioning feature of the

MX2800 is used during this step.

To use the Set Multiple feature, select the attribute from the Configure T1/E1 Interface screen.

From the Set Multiple screen, confirm that First = 1 and Last = 28 . If not, make the necessary corrections. Select State to toggle the State as necessary until the correct setting is displayed, and select Apply settings to set all 28 DS1s to that mode. Press E SC

twice to return to the Configure T1/E1 Interface menu.

2. Select T1/E1 State . If all channels are set to Auto Enable (default), press E SC to get back to the

Configure T1/E1 Interface menu and proceed to the next step. If not, perform the Set Multiple routine referenced above.

3. Select T1/E1 Line Coding . If all channels are set to B8ZS (default), press E SC

to get back to the

Configure T1/E1 Interface menu and proceed to the next step. If not, perform the Set Multiple routine accordingly.

4. Select T1/E1 Line length . If all channels are set correctly ( 0-133 , 133-266 , 266-399 , 399-533 or 533-

655 feet ) as appropriate for the installation, proceed to the next step. If not, perform the Set

Multiple routine accordingly.

5. Select T1/E1Loopback Detection .

6. Select Set Multiple . Set First to 1 , Last to 28 , Loopback Detection to Disabled. Select Apply Settings .

7. Press E SC

twice to return to the Configure T1/E1 Interface menu.

8. Select T1/Circuit Protection .

9. Select Set Multiple . Set First to 1 and Last to 28 . Set Circuit Protection to Enabled . Select Apply

Settings .

10. Press E SC

once and select Protection Threshold . Enter a value of 1 and press E SC

once to return to the Configure T1/E1 Interface menu.

11. Select XCV Threshold . Select Disabled .

12. Press the E SC

key to get back to the main Configuration menu.

A-4 61200290L1-1H

Appendix A, Acceptance Test Procedure

Alarm Relay Configuration

Although there are numerous alarm configuration options available on the MX2800, the ability to generate only one Critical and one Noncritical alarm are the only requirements for this part of the acceptance test process. These requirements confirms that the alarm contacts are wired and operating correctly and transmitting the appropriate alarm conditions back to the central office alarm panel.

1. From the main Configuration menu, select System Management .

2. Select Alarm Relay Configuration to get to the Alarm Relay Configuration screen.

3. As necessary, toggle the DS3 LOS state to Enabled , thus forcing generation of a Critical alarm when the DS3 port sees a Loss of Signal condition.

4. As necessary, toggle the LOS state to Enabled , thus forcing generation of a Noncritical alarm when a DS1 port sees a Loss of Signal condition.

5. Toggle the SAVE CONFIG state.

VERIFYING THE DATA INTEGRITY

Now that the system has been properly provisioned for acceptance testing, proceed with the testing of the system. The first key test is to verify that the MX2800 can pass traffic between the DS1 and DS3 ports. Three different methods of testing are presented. One of the three should be selected based on test equipment availability and network configuration. All of the tests are performed at the DSX-1 and DSX-3 cross-connect bays or connecting equipment so that both the MX2800 circuitry and the office cabling are tested. If problems are encountered during testing, refer to

“Section 4, Status” and

“Section 5, Statistics”

for assistance with problem determination.

DS1 Daisy-Chain to DS3 (Hard) Loopback

This test can be performed single-handedly, and it can be used only if DS1s are terminated at the DSX1. It loads all 28 ports of the MX2800 with traffic at the same time, but it does not confirm DS3 cabling integrity (transmit Vs. receive).

Equipment Required:

• 1 DS1 test set for running a BERT

• 28 DS1 bantam test cords

• 1 DS3 test cord

Follow these procedures to test the daisy-chain.

1. At the DSX-3 cross-connect panel or connecting equipment, loop the DS3 from the

MX2800 back on itself. Confirm that the MX2800 sees a good DS3 signal. The DS3 STA-

TUS LED should be solid green on the Active Controller, and the DS3 test set should be in frame synchronization with the MX2800.

2. At the DSX-1 cross-connect panel, insert the Transmit output of the DS1 test set into the

Input of the first DS1 channel of the MX2800.

3. At the DSX-1, install a bantam test cord from the Output of the first DS1 channel to the

Input of the second; then connect a second bantam test cord from the Output of the second

61200290L1-1H A-5

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

DS1 channel to the Input of the third DS1 channel. Repeat this procedure for all 28 DS1 channels.

4. Connect the Output of the 28th DS1 channel to the Receive input of the DS1 test set.

5. Set the test set options for ESF/B8ZS, and run a standard BERT using QRSS or other preferred test pattern(s).

6. All alarms should clear on the MX2800, and the BERT should run error free. Troubleshoot as necessary.

7. Leave this test setup in place, as it will be used during the redundancy testing portion of this document. Proceed to

“Verifying Alarm Notification” on page A-7.

DS1 to DS3 Head-to-Head Test

This test is ordinarily a two-person operation, and it is the preferred means of testing system and cabling integrity. It tests one DS1 channel at a time, using a DS1 test set at the DSX-1 cross-connect panel or connecting equipment and a DS3 test set at the DSX-3 or connecting equipment location.

Equipment Required:

• 1 DS1 test set capable of running a BERT

• 1 DS3 test set capable of accessing and running a BERT on a single DS1

Follow these procedures to execute the head-to-head test.

1. At the DSX-3 cross-connect panel or connecting equipment, properly connect the DS3 test set to the DS3 coming from the MX2800. Confirm transmit and receive integrity, an integral step in the process.

2. Configure the DS3 test set for C-Bit Framing, the appropriate LBO, and set to drop out

DS1 #1. Configure the DS1 BERT to run in ESF/B8ZS mode using QRSS or other preferred test pattern. Confirm that the MX2800 sees a good DS3 signal. The DS3 STATUS

LED should be solid green on the Active Controller, and the DS3 test set should be in frame synchronization with the MX2800.

3. At the DSX-1 cross-connect bay or connecting equipment, connect the DS1 test set to the first DS1 channel of the MX2800. Configure the test set for the same framing, line code, and BERT pattern as the DS3 test set. Confirm a good, error-free BERT for a minimal period, such as 15 seconds.

4. Repeat for DS1 channels 2-28 by moving the DS1 test cables and reconfiguring the DS3 test set to drop out the appropriate DS1 channel under test.

5. The MX2800 condition is in an alarm because of the previously tested and now unterminated DS1 ports, but this should not prohibit a successful BERT between the DS1 and DS3 test sets on the channel under test.

6. Leave this test setup in place, as it will be used during the redundancy testing portion of this document. Proceed to

“Verifying Alarm Notification” on page A-7.

A-6 61200290L1-1H

Appendix A, Acceptance Test Procedure

DS1 to DS3 (Hard) Loopback

This test requires minimal test equipment, tests one DS1 at a time, and can be performed single-handedly. It does not verify DS3 cabling integrity (transmit Vs. receive) to the DSX3 or connecting equipment.

Equipment Required:

• 1 DS1 test set capable of running a BERT test

• 1 DS3 DSX test cord

Follow these procedures to test one DS1 at a time:

1. At the DSX-3 cross-connect panel or connecting equipment, loop the DS3 from the

MX2800 back on itself. Confirm that the MX2800 sees a good DS3 signal. The DS3 STATUS

LED should be solid green on the Active Controller, and the DS3 test set should be in frame synchronization with the MX2800.

2. At the DSX-1 cross-connect bay or connecting equipment, insert the Transmit output of the

DS1 test set to the DS1 Input of the first channel of the MX2800. Connect the Receive input of the test set to the Output of the first DS1 channel of the MX2800.

3. Configure the DS1 test set for ESF/B8ZS and the desired BERT pattern, such as QRSS.

4. All alarms should clear on the MX2800, and the BERT should run error free. Troubleshoot as necessary.

5. Repeat the above procedure for DS1 channels 2-28. The MX2800 will be in an alarm condition because of the unterminated DS1 ports, but this condition should not prohibit a successful BERT.

6. Leave this test setup in place, as it will be used during the redundancy testing portion of this document. Proceed to

“Verifying Alarm Notification”

.

VERIFYING ALARM NOTIFICATION

The MX2800 has two sets of alarm relay contacts available for connection to external alarm systems. They are located on the back panel and are designated as Critical , and Noncritical .

Normally Open and normally Closed contacts are available for each of the relay outputs. The

Critical alarm is activated when the DS3 port experiences a Loss of Signal (LOS) event. The

Noncritical alarm is activated when one of the 28 DS1 ports experiences a Loss of Signal event. Detailed alarm testing procedures are described below.

Critical Alarm Relay Test

This test actuates the Critical alarm relay contacts.

Equipment Required:

• 1 DS3 DSX test cord

Follow these procedures to test one the critical alarm relay.

1. Ensure that the DS3 is not in alarm. To do this, place a hard loopback of the DS3 toward the MX2800 using a test cord at the DSX-3 cross-connect panel or connecting equipment.

2. With the loopback in place, all alarms should clear on the Controller Module DS3 port.

The DS3 STATUS LED should be solid green on the Active Controller).

61200290L1-1H A-7

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

3. Remove the loopback from the DS3 and ensure that no other DS3 signal is entering the

MX2800 through the DSX-3 cross-connect bay or connecting equipment, such as DCS.

4. The MX2800 should go into Critical alarm, thus closing the relay contacts and sending the alarm to the alarm monitoring equipment.

5. Verify that the alarm is being properly reported as a Critical alarm.

Noncritical Alarm Relay Test

This test actuates the Noncritical alarm relay contacts.

Equipment Required:

• 1 DS3 DSX test cord

Follow these procedures to test one the noncritical alarm relay.

1. Ensure that the DS3 is not in alarm. The DS3 STATUS LED should be solid green on the

Active Controller. To do this, re-install a hard loopback of the DS3 toward the MX2800.

2. Ensure that the 28 DS1s are out of alarm. To accomplish this, proceed as follows: a. At the DSX-1 cross-connect, insert the Transmit of the DS1 test set into the Input of the first DS1 channel of the MX2800. Install a bantam test cord from the Output of the first

DS1 channel to the Input of the second DS1 channel. Then connect a second bantam test cord from the Output of the second DS1 channel to the Input of the third DS1.

b. Repeat this procedure for all 28 DS1 channels. Connect the Output of the 28th DS1 channel to the Receive of the DS1 test set. Configure the test set for ESF/B8ZS and run a standard BERT test using QRSS or other preferred test pattern(s).

3. Nothing should be in alarm. The DS1 STATUS LEDs should all be solid green on the Active

Controller. Remove any one of the bantam cords from the DSX bay. Removing this cord causes a DS1 LOS alarm, which results in the actuation of the Noncritical alarm relay.

4. Verify that the Noncritical alarms are being properly reported to the office alarm monitoring equipment.

VERIFYING SYSTEM REDUNDANCY

This section addresses the redundancy features of the MX2800. The MX2800 supports redundancy of both the Power Supply and Controller Modules. The equipment configuration (nonredundant vs. redundant and type of power redundancy) are useful in determining what can and cannot be tested. The following sections describe the tests for various configurations.

Power Supply Redundancy

When installed, the MX2800 can be wired to have either one or two –48 VDC power feeds A and B . In addition, the MX2800 chassis can be equipped with either one or two Power Supply modules. Test scenarios for the two most common configurations follow. Testing of the other configurations is a subset of the following.

A-8 61200290L1-1H

Appendix A, Acceptance Test Procedure

Single Power Supply Module / Dual Power Feeds

When the MX2800 is equipped with only a single Power Supply module, there is no protection against a failure of the module itself. However, the single Power Supply is capable of utilizing the A and B power feeds to protect against a failure in one of the power sources feeding the shelf. To verify that the MX2800 is properly utilizing the A and B power feeds, the following procedure is recommended:

1. With the MX2800 installed and operating normally, go to the fuse panel at the top of the bay and remove the fuse corresponding to the A power feed for the MX2800 shelf. Removing this fuse should have no effect on the operation of the shelf because the MX2800 is operating on the B power feed.

2. Reinsert the fuse for the A power feed.

3. Now, remove the B power feed fuse for the MX2800 shelf. Once again, there should be no effect on the operation of the shelf because the MX2800 is operating on the A power feed.

4. Reinsert the fuse for the B power feed.

Dual Power Supply Modules / Dual Power Feeds

When the MX2800 is equipped with two Power Supply modules and also wired to support dual power feeds, the shelf is protected against a failure of either of the Power Supply cards or a failure of one of the power sources feeding the shelf. Use the following procedure to confirm the operation of this fully redundant configuration:

1. With the MX2800 installed and operating normally, remove the A Power Supply card (the one on the left). Removing this card should have no effect on the operation of the shelf because the MX2800 is operating on the B Power Supply.

2. Go to the fuse panel at the top of the bay and remove the fuse corresponding to the A power feed. Removing this fuse should have no effect on the operation of the shelf because the B Power Supply is running on the B power feed.

3. Reinsert the fuse for the A power feed.

4. Remove the fuse corresponding to the B power feed to the shelf. Doing so should have no effect on the operation of the shelf as the B Power Supply is operating on the A power feed.

5. Reinsert the fuse for the B power feed.

6. Reinsert the A Power Supply into the MX2800 chassis.

7. Remove the B Power Supply card (the one on the right). Doing so should have no effect on the operation of the shelf because the MX2800 is operating on the A Power Supply.

8. Go to the fuse panel at the top of the bay and remove the fuse corresponding to the A power feed. Removing this fuse should have no effect on the operation of the shelf because the A Power Supply is now running on the B power feed.

9. Reinsert the fuse for the A power feed.

10. Remove the fuse corresponding to the B power feed to the shelf. Removing this fuse should have no effect on the operation of the shelf as the A Power Supply is operating on the A power feed.

11. Reinsert the fuse for the B power feed.

12. Reinsert the B Power Supply into the MX2800 chassis.

61200290L1-1H A-9

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

13. Confirm that both power supplies and power feeds are functioning as normal. Front panel

LEDs identify problems with the power supplies, but the inputs can be tested only via

VOM.

Controller Card Redundancy

The MX2800 can be equipped with either one or two Controller cards. The Controller contains all of the MX2800's critical circuitry, including the DS3 interface, DS1 interfaces, management and communications hardware/firmware, etc. If the MX2800 is equipped with only one Controller, there is no protection against failure. If a failure does occur to the

Controller, an alarm is initiated; and the front panel LEDs reflect the condition. The ACT LED is either solid or flashing red.

If the MX2800 is equipped with two Controller modules, all traffic is protected and can be switched over to the Standby Controller in the event of a card failure. The following procedures demonstrate the functionality of a Controller switchover:

1. Using the BERT setup that should still be in place from previous testing, ensure that the system is still passing traffic error free.

2. Log into the MX2800 (if necessary) via the craft port to get to the Main Menu screen. From there, select Configuration , followed by Network Interface and Active Controller .

3. This procedure shows which Controller ( A or B ) is currently Active. If the A Controller is

Active, select Controller B as the Active Controller. Doing so forces a switch to the B

Controller, which is acting as a hot standby. If the B Controller is the Active Controller, force a switch to the A Controller.

4. Traffic is interrupted momentarily during the switch but quickly returns to error-free performance again on the new Controller.

5. Although either Controller can be the Active Controller, for consistency, the A Controller should be left as the Active one.

NOTE

Repeat the log-in sequence in Step 2 after each protection switch.

A-10 61200290L1-1H

Appendix A, Acceptance Test Procedure

RESTORING DEFAULT SETTINGS

After all Acceptance Tests have been successfully completed, the MX2800 can be restored to its default settings by following the procedures below:

1. Log into the MX2800, if necessary, via the craft port. From the Main Menu, select Configuration , followed by Utilities and Load Default Settings .

2. Once the settings have been retrieved and loaded into the system, Command Accepted appears at the bottom of the screen. The Standby Controller always maintains an exact copy of the Active Controller’s attributes. Confirm that all settings are as expected via the craft port.

3. Normalize all loopbacks as appropriate, and restore all cabling and DSX panels to normal.

Office and Autonomous alarms may be generated as a result of performing Step 3, above. DS3 alarms can be cleared by looping the DS3 back toward the MX2800 and setting the MX2800

Timing to Local via the craft port by selecting Configuration , Network Interface and Timing from the

Main Menu , or by ensuring continuity to and proper provisioning of the MX2800 and connecting equipment.

At the DS1 level, the MX2800 has three Service States. They operate as follows:

• Disabled – No signal continuity exists through the MX2800, and no alarms are detected or transmitted.

• Enabled – Signal continuity and alarming are always enabled.

• Auto Enable (default) – Signal continuity and alarming exist only after a DS1 signal is detected at the DS1 input to the MX2800. Once a signal is detected, the only way to disable alarming is to momentarily toggle the DS1 channel to the Disable state as follows:

From the Main Menu, select Configuration , T1/E1 Interface and T1 State . From the T1/E1 State screen, enter the DS1# in question; then disable signal continuity and alarm transmission. Repeat the process of selecting the DS1 from the T1/E1 State screen, but this time select Auto Enable to once again provision the slot/channel for service. No alarms are transmitted until a DS1 signal has been detected and removed, or an unframed signal is detected.

CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM FOR TRAFFIC READINESS

After the previous tests are successfully completed and the default settings are restored, the

MX2800 can be considered ready for customer traffic. Specific provisioning of the DS3, DS1, and other options is determined by circuit orders and local practices.

61200290L1-1H A-11

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

SIGNING-OFF THE MX2800 ATP CHECKLIST

Use Table A-2

to identify the MX2800 configuration, identify tests performed, etc.

Table A-2. MX2800 ATP Checklist

Acceptance Test Procedure Steps

Verifying the Installed Options

Dual Power Supplies / Dual Power Feeds

Dual Power Supplies / Single Power Feed

Single Power Supply / Dual Power Feeds

Single Power Supply / Single Power Feed

Dual Controllers

Single Controller

Configuring the System

Accessing the Craft Port

Provisioning the DS3 Port

Provisioning the DS1 Ports

Alarm Relay Configuration

Verifying the Data Integrity

DS1 Daisy-Chain to DS3 (Hard) Loopback

DS1 to DS3 “Head-to-Head” Test

DS1 to DS3 (Hard) Loopback

Verifying Alarm Notification

Critical Alarm Relay Test

Noncritical Alarm Relay Test

Verifying System Redundancy

Redundancy Tests (Power Supply and Power Feed as appropriate)

Controller Card Redundancy Test

Autonomous Alarm Reporting

Restoring Default Settings

Configuring the System for Traffic Readiness

Completed

Name:

Location:

Date:

Relay Rack:

A-12 61200290L1-1H

Appendix B

Pinouts

INTRODUCTION

Table B-1 ,

Table B-2

,

Table B-3

, and

Table B-4 list the pin assignments for the connectors

located on the MX2800. For more information on these connectors, refer to

“Section 2, Installation and Operation” .

Table B-1. Craft Port Pin Assignments

6

7

4

5

RJ Pin#

1

2

3

8

-

* Used for hardware flow control.

8

4

6

2

DB-9

5

7

3

1

9

Function

GND

RTS

TD

DSR

RD

CTS*

DTR

DCD not used

Direction

O

-

O

I

O

O

I

I

61200290L1-1H B-1

Pin

1

2

3

4, 5

6

7, 8

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Name

TD+

TD-

RD+

N/A

RD-

N/A

Table B-2. LAN Port Pin Assignments

Description

The positive signal for the TD differential pair. This signal contains the serial output data stream transmitted onto the network.

The negative signal for the TD differential pair (pins 1 and 2).

The positive signal for the RD differential pair. This signal contains the serial input data stream received from the network.

not used

The negative signal for the RD differential pair (pins 3 and 6).

not used

Pin

1,2,3

4

5

6,7,8

Table B-3. Modem Port Pin Assignment

Description

Not used tip

Ring

Not used

6

7

4

5

8

Pin

1

2

3

NOTE

The modem port assignment apply only to units equipped with an internal modem (P/N4200290L1, P/N4200290L2, P/N4200290L3, and P/N4200290L4).

Table B-4. Amphenol Pin Assignments

Function

RING 1

RING 2

RING 3

RING 4

RING 5

RING 6

RING 7

RING 8

36

37

38

39

40

Pin

33

34

35

Function

TIP 1

TIP 2

TIP 3

TIP 4

TIP 5

TIP 6

TIP 7

TIP 8

B-2 61200290L1-1H

Pin

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

29

30

31

32

25

26

27

28

Appendix B, Pinouts

Table B-4. Amphenol Pin Assignments (Continued)

Function

RING 17

RING 18

RING 19

RING 20

RING 21

RING 22

RING 23

RING 24

RING 9

RING 10

RING 11

RING 12

RING 13

RING 14

RING 15

RING 16

RING 25

RING 26

RING 27

RING 28

N/A

N/A

N/A

FGND

Pin

53

54

55

56

49

50

51

52

45

46

47

48

41

42

43

44

61

62

63

64

57

58

59

60

Function

TIP 17

TIP 18

TIP 19

TIP 20

TIP 21

TIP 22

TIP 23

TIP 24

TIP 9

TIP 10

TIP 11

TIP 12

TIP 13

TIP 14

TIP 15

TIP 16

TIP 25

TIP 26

TIP 27

TIP 28

N/A

N/A

N/A

FGND

NOTE

Table B-4

applies to both the In and Out DSX1/E1 amphenol connectors.

61200290L1-1H B-3

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

B-4 61200290L1-1H

Appendix C

Specifications Summary

INTRODUCTION

This appendix describes the standard specifications and features incorporated in the

MX2800.

SPECIFICATIONS AND FEATURES

The specification and features paragraphs are as follows:

• DSX-3 Network Interface

• DSX-1 Interface(s)

• Clocking

• Loopbacks

• Management

• Alarms

• Agency Approvals

• Environment

• Power

• Physical

DSX-3 Network Interface

Channelized DS3

Line length: short (less than 225 ft.) and long (greater than 225 ft.)

Framing format: M13 and C-bit parity

Line rate: 44.736 Mbps

Line interface: dual 75-ohm BNC coax female connectors

DSX-1 Interface(s)

Line length: 0-655 feet

Line rate: 1.544 Mbps

Line code: AMI or B8ZS

Line interface(s): two 64-pin amphenol connectors

61200290L1-1H C-1

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Clocking

Network: receive from DS3 network

Local: internally generated

External: receive from T1/E1 port or BITS clock from wire-wrap pins on back of chassis

Loopbacks

DS3 Network

ANSI T1.107 compatible loopbacks

Line loopbacks

DS2 Interfaces

DS2 network loopbacks

DSX-1 Interfaces

Local and network loopbacks

Management

Supported by Total Access Element Management System (JAVA application that provides configuration, performance, network assurance, and provisioning functions). Refer to www.adtran.com

website product area for additional information.

Supported by ADVISION (graphical user interface (GUI) SNMP management tool integrated into HP OpenView UNIX platform on SUN Solaris or HP-UX). Refer to www.adtran.com

website product area for additional information.

VT100 Terminal Interface

RJ-48, EIA-232 compatible, female DB-9 adapter provided

Integrated Modem Interface (4200290L1, 4200290L2, 4200290L3, 4200290L4)

Dial up access for VT100, SNMP, or Telnet

Dial out “Cry for help”

SNMP/Telnet

Integrated 10Base-T Ethernet

MIB II (RFC 1213), RFC 1215, and RFC 1407 compliant.

ADTRAN Enterprise MIB for extended monitoring and control/configuration

Alarms

External alarm contacts for critical, major, and minor alarms

Normally Open (NO) and Normally Closed (NC) pinout

Front panel alarm cutoff switch

C-2 61200290L1-1H

Agency Approvals

FCC Part 15, Class A, Part 68

Industry Canada CS03

UL and CUL

NEBS Level 3

Environment

Operating: –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to 149°F)

Storage: –40°C to +85°C (–40°F to 185°F)

Relative Humidity: Up to 95%, nonconducting

Power

AC version: 120VAC, 27W

DC version: –48 VDC, 30 W

DC version: +24VDC, 30 W

Physical

Dimensions: 7.86” D x 17.0” W x 1.7” H

Weight: 5.5 lbs. (redundant); 4.5 lbs. (nonredundant)

Appendix C, Specifications Summary

61200290L1-1H C-3

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

C-4 61200290L1-1H

Appendix D

Acronyms/Abbreviations

A

ACO ..................... alarm cut off

ACT...................... active

AIS....................... alarm indication signal

ALM ..................... alarm

AMI ...................... alternate mark inversion

Amp ..................... amphenol

ANSI..................... American National Standards Institute

async ................... asynchronous

B

BERT ................... bit error rate test

bps ....................... bits per second

BPV ...................... bipolar violation

C

CA........................ communications equipment available

CAIS..................... carrier side alarm indication signal

CCITT .................. Consultive Committee for International Telephony and Telegraphy

CCV...................... C-bit coding violation

CD........................ carrier detect

CES...................... C-bit errored seconds

CO........................ central office

CPE...................... customer premise equipment

CRC ..................... cyclic redundancy check

CS ........................ clear to send

CSES .................... C-bit severely errored seconds

61200290L1-1H D-1

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

CSU...................... channel service unit

CTS ...................... clear to send

CV........................ coding violation

D

dB ........................ decibel

DBU ..................... dial backup

DCD ..................... data carrier detect

DCE ..................... data communications equipment

DDS...................... digital data service

DLCI..................... data link connection identifier

DS1 ...................... digital signal Level 1

DS3 ...................... digital signal Level 3

DSR...................... data set ready

DSU...................... data service unit

DSX-1................... digital signal cross connect, Level 1

DTE...................... data terminal equipment

DTR ..................... data terminal ready

E

ES ........................ errored seconds

Eq ........................ equipment

Eqpt ..................... equipment

EXZ...................... excessive zeros

F

FBE...................... F-bit errors

FCC...................... Federal Communications Commission

FDL ...................... facility datalink

FEAC.................... far-end alarm and control

FEBE.................... far-end block error

H

HSSI..................... high-speed serial interface

I

IP ......................... internet protocol

D-2 61200290L1-1H

K

KA........................ keep alive

L

LAIS ..................... loop-side alarm indication signal

LAN ...................... local area network

LCV ...................... line coding violation

LED...................... light emitting diode

LES ...................... line errored seconds

LIU....................... line interface unit

LL ........................ local loopback

LOF...................... loss of framing

LOS ...................... loss of signal

M

MBE ..................... M-bit errors

Mbps .................... megabits per second

MIB ...................... management information base

ms........................ millisecond

N

NC........................ normally closed

NI......................... network interface

NMS ..................... network management system

NO........................ normally open

NRZ...................... non-return to zero

NSA...................... non-service-affecting

O

OCU ..................... office channel unit

OOF ..................... out of frame

OOS ..................... out of service

P

PCV...................... P-bit coding violation

PES ...................... P-bit errored seconds

POP...................... point of presence

61200290L1-1H

Appendix D, Acronyms/Abbreviations

D-3

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

PPP ...................... point-to-point protocol

PRF...................... performance

PSES .................... P-bit severely errored seconds

PSTN .................... public switched telephone network

PVC...................... permanent virtual circuit

R

RD ....................... receive data

RDL...................... remote digital loopback

RL ........................ remote loopback

RMA ..................... return material authorization

RS........................ request to send

RTS...................... request to send

Rx ........................ receive

S

SA ........................ service affecting

SEFS .................... severely errored framing seconds

SES ...................... severely errored seconds

SLIP ..................... serial line internet protocol

SNMP ................... simple network management protocol

SONET .................synchronous optical network

SR........................ data set ready

SW56 ................... switched 56

sync ..................... synchronous

T

TA ........................ terminal equipment available

TD........................ transmit data

TDM ..................... time division multiplexing

TM ....................... test mode

TR........................ data terminal ready

Tx ........................ transmit

U

UAS...................... unavailable seconds

D-4 61200290L1-1H

W

WAN ..................... wide area network

X

XCV ..................... excessive coding violations

Appendix D, Acronyms/Abbreviations

61200290L1-1H D-5

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

D-6 61200290L1-1H

Appendix E

Glossary

#

10Base-T

A

AMI

ANSI asynchronous

B

bandwidth baud rate

BERT bipolar bipolar violation bit bit error

61200290L1-1H

Ethernet connector which implements the IEEE standard on 24gauge, unshielded twisted-pair wiring.

Alternate Mark Inversion. A bipolar line-coding format in T1 transmission systems whereby successive ones are alternately inverted.

American National Standards Institute. A nonprofit organization that coordinates voluntary standards activities in the United

States.

A method of data transmission which allows characters to be sent at irregular intervals by preceding each character with a start bit followed by a stop bit.

The bandwidth determines the rate at which information can be sent through a channel (the greater the bandwidth, the more information that can be sent in a given amount of time).

A measure of transmission speed over an analog phone line. Baud rate measures the shortest signaling elements per second in the analog signal that a modem sends over an analog phone line. Does not necessarily equal the bit rate.

Bit error rate test. A test that uses any of a number of stress patterns to test T3, T1, FT1, and DDS circuits.

A signal containing both positive and negative amplitude components.

See “BPV” .

A binary digit representing a signal, wave, or state as either a one or a zero. A bit is the smallest unit of information a computer can process.

The receipt of an encoded bit that differs from what was sent by the transmitter.

E-1

MX2800M13 Multiplexer User Manual bit rate bps

BPV bridge byte

The speed at which bits are transmitted, usually expressed in bits per second (bps).

Bits per second. The number of bits passing a specific point per second. Examples of common rates are kbps (one thousand bits per second) and Mbps (one million bits per second). T3 operates at

44.736 Mbps.

Bipolar violation. A violation in the alternate mark inversion (AMI) line code in which consecutive 1s are represented by pulses of opposite polarity. BPVs that are not intentional (B8ZS) are counted as errors. Could also be the presence of two consecutive 1 bits of the same polarity on the T-carrier line.

A data communications device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets between them.

Generally, an 8-bit quantity of information. This term is used mainly in referring to parallel data transfer, semiconductor capacity, and data storage.

C

carrier

C-bit

CCITT

CD channel channel bank channel service unit clocking

The provider of the telecommunication services to the customer site. Carriers can be local telephone companies, regional telephone companies, or any inter-exchange carrier such as AT&T, Sprint, or

MCI.

An overhead bit in the DS3 string not used for framing, parity, or alarm indication.

Consultive Committee for International Telephony and Telegraphy.

A standards organization that devises and proposes recommendations for international communications. See also ANSI.

Carrier detect. A signal generated by a modem or DSU/CSU indicating the presence of a carrier signal on a communications link.

A transmission path between two or more termination points, also called a circuit, facility, line, link, or path.

Equipment in a telephone central office or customer premises that performs multiplexing of lower-speed digital channels into a higher-speed composite channel. The channel bank also detects and transmits signaling information for each channel, thereby transmitting framing information so that time slots allocated to each channel can be identified by the receiver.

See “CSU” .

An oscillator-generated signal that provides a timing reference for a transmission link. A clock provides signals used in a transmission system to control the timing of certain functions. The clock has two functions: (1) to generate periodic signals for synchronization, and

(2) to provide a time base.

E-2 61200290L1-1H

Appendix E, Glossary

CPE craft port

CSU

CTS

Customer premises equipment. All telecommunications terminal equipment located on the customer premises, including telephone sets, private branch exchanges (PBXs), data terminals, and customer-owned , coin-operated telephones.

The data communications interface between the MX2800 and the control terminal. The control terminal is used to communicate commands to the unit.

Channel service unit. A device used to connect a digital phone line coming in from the phone company to either a multiplexer, channel bank, or directly to another device producing a digital signal; for example, a digital PBX, a PC, or data communications device. A

CSU performs certain line-conditioning and equalization functions and responds to loopback commands sent from the central office. A

CSU also regenerates digital signals. It monitors them for problems and provides a means of testing the digital circuit.

Clear to send. A signal on the DTE interface indicating that the

DCE is clear to send data.

D

data communications equipment data service unit dB

DCE

DDS delay

DLCI

DS1

See “DCE” .

See “DSU” .

Decibel. A unit of measure of signal strength, usually the relation between a transmitted signal and a standard signal source.

Data communications equipment. Device that provides all the functions required for connection to telephone company lines and for converting signals between telephone lines and DTE. Also see

“DTE” .

Digital data service. A private line digital service for transmitting data end-to-end at speeds of 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and 56 kbps (and, in some cases, 19.2, 38.4, or 64 kbps). The systems can use central hub offices for obtaining test access, bridging legs of multi-point circuits, and cross connecting equipment. DDS is offered on an inter-LATA (local access and transport area) basis by AT&T and on an intra-LATA basis by the Bell operating companies.

The amount of time by which a signal is delayed. A round-trip transmission delay measurement helps detect possible causes of protocol timeouts.

Datalink communications identifier. A unique number assigned to a PVC endpoint in a frame relay network. Identifies a particular

PVC endpoint within a user's access channel in a frame relay network and has local significance only to that channel.

Digital signal Level 1. Twenty-four DS0 channels make up one

DS1. (Total bandwidth is 1.544 Mbps.)

61200290L1-1H E-3

MX2800M13 Multiplexer User Manual

DS3

DSU

DTE

Digital signal Level 3. Equivalent of 28 DS1s and 672 DS0s. (Total bandwidth is 44.736 Mbps.)

Data service unit. A device designed to transmit and receive digital data on digital transmission facilities.

Data terminal equipment. The end-user terminal or computer that plugs into the termination point (DCE) of a communications circuit. The main difference between the DCE and the DTE is that

Pins 2 and 3 are reversed.

E

E1 end device end user

ES

Ethernet

F

facilities far end

FCC

FDL

Transmission rates of 2.048 Mbps are available on T1 communication lines. See also “T1” .

The ultimate source or destination of data flowing through a network (sometimes referred to as DTE).

Subscriber who uses (rather than provides) telecommunications services.

Errored seconds. A second with one or more coding violations

(CVs).

Transmission protocol for packet-switching LANs.

The equipment used by carriers to provide communication services.

The distant end to that being considered. Not the end where testing is being carried out.

Federal Communications Commission. The U.S. federal agency responsible for regulating interstate and international communications by radio, TV, wire, satellite, and cable.

Facility datalink. FDL bits provide overhead communication between the terminal equipment in ESF framing.

G

gateway A device which enables information to be exchanged between two dissimilar systems or networks.

H

host computer The primary or controlling computer in a multiple computer operation.

I

idle code In a T3 circuit, an idle code consists of a sequence of 1100 over the entire payload bandwidth.

E-4 61200290L1-1H

in-band

IP

L

LAN local loopback (LL) loopback

LOS

M

M13

Mbps

MIB modem monitor multi-point circuit

N

NC near end

NI

NO

Appendix E, Glossary

Signaling (dialing, loopbacks, management, configuration, etc.) over the same channel used for data.

Internet protocol. A protocol which provides for transmitting blocks of data between hosts identified by fixed-length addresses.

Local area network. A privately owned network that offers highspeed communications channels to connect information processing equipment in a limited geographic area.

A type of test used to verify the operation of the local terminal equipment, the CSU, and the connection between the two. The signal from the DTE is looped back by the CSU and is sent back to the DTE.

The technique for testing the processing circuitry of a communications device. May be initiated locally or remotely via a telecommunications circuit. Device being tested will echo back received test data. The results are compared with the original data.

Loss of signal. Defined as a line state in which no pulses are received for 175 bit positions.

DS1/DS3 multiplexer that combines up to 28 DS1 channels into one DS3 channel. Uses two-stage, bit synchronous TDM.

Megabits per second (one million bits per second).

Management information base. A database of network management information used by SNMP.

Acronym for modulator/demodulator. Equipment that converts digital signals to and from analog signals. Used to send digital signals over analog phone lines.

To watch or listen to a signal non intrusively.

A single communications circuit that has more than two terminations.

Normally closed. Relay switch contacts that remain closed when inactive.

The on-site unit.

Network interface. The demarcation point between the CPE and the

PSTN.

Normally open. Relay switch contacts that remain open when inactive.

61200290L1-1H E-5

MX2800M13 Multiplexer User Manual

NRZ Non return to zero. A mode in which the digital level is low for a 0 bit and high for a 1 bit, and does not return to zero between successive 1 bits.

O

out-of-band Signaling that is separated from the channel carrying information

(voice, data, video, etc.). Typically the separation is accomplished by a filter. The signaling includes dialing and other supervisory signals.

P

point-to-point

POP protocol

PSTN service provider

SES signaling

Type of communications link that connects a single device to another single device, such as a remote terminal to a host computer.

Point of presence. Physical place within a LATA (local access and transport area) where a long distance carrier or a cellular provider interfaces with the network of the local exchange carrier (LEC). A

POP is usually a building serving as the point of termination which houses switches and transmission equipment.

A set of rules controlling the orderly exchange of information between stations in data communications networks or systems.

Public switched telephone network. Usually refers to the worldwide voice telephone network available for public use.

R

red alarm remote configuration router

Unframed all ones signal (keep alive signal). A red alarm is declared on detection of LOS or OOF not caused by an alarm indication signal (AIS) that persists for more than two seconds.

A feature designed into ADTRAN products that allows remote units to be configured from a local unit or a VT100-compatible terminal.

A device that supports communications between networks. Routers are similar to bridges, except that routers provide more functionality (such as finding the best route between networks and providing network management capabilities).

S

service The provision of telecommunications to customers by a common carrier, administration, or private operating agency using voice, data, and/or video technologies.

A company that delivers or sells a telecom service.

Severely errored seconds. A second in which more than 320 code violations (CVs) occurred or an OOF condition occurred.

Communication between switches to set up and terminate calls.

E-6 61200290L1-1H

SNMP

SONET

SR synchronous

T

T1

T3

TDM

Telnet transceiver transmission

V

V.35

VT100

W

WAN

Appendix E, Glossary

Simple network management protocol. A control and reporting scheme widely used to manage devices from various vendors.

SNMP operates on top of the Internet protocol.

Synchronous optical network. A standard format for transporting a wide range of digital telecommunications services over optical fiber.

SONET is characterized by standard line rates, optical interfaces, and signal formats.

Data set ready. A signal on the DTE interface that indicates if a connection exists and if the devices are ready to start handshaking control signals so communications can begin.

Communications in which the timing is achieved by sharing a single clock. Each end of the transmission synchronizes itself with the use of clocks and information sent along with the transmitted data.

Transmission rates of 1.544 Mbps are available on T1 communication lines. Also referred to as digital signal Level 1 (DS-1). See also

“E1” .

Transmission rates of 44.736 Mbps are available on T3 communication lines. Also referred to as digital signal Level 3 (DS-3).

Time division multiplexing. A technique for transmitting two or more signals at the same time over a single communication medium. This is accomplished by allocating channels to the bandwidth for specific increments of time.

The standard TCP/IP remote login protocol specified in RFC-854.

A combination of transmitter and receiver, providing both output and input interfaces within a single device.

The signaling of data over telecommunications channels.

A standard for trunk interface between a network access device and a packet network that defines signaling for data rates greater than 19.2 kbps.

A non intelligent terminal or terminal emulation mode used for asynchronous communications. Used to configure the MX2800.

Wide area network. A communications network serving geographically separate areas. A WAN typically extends a LAN outside the building to link to other LANs over telephone lines.

61200290L1-1H E-7

MX2800M13 Multiplexer User Manual

Y

yellow alarm A T3 yellow alarm is an indication sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit in a DS3 two-way transmission path. The Xbits (X1 and X2) are set to zero.

E-8 61200290L1-1H

Appendix F

Warranty

WARRANTY AND CUSTOMER SERVICE

ADTRAN will replace or repair this product within the warranty period if it does not meet its published specifications or fails while in service. Warranty information can be found at www.adtran.com/warranty .

Refer to the following subsections for sales, support, Customer and Product Service (CAPS) requests, or further information.

ADTRAN Sales

Pricing/Availability:

800-827-0807

ADTRAN Technical Support

Pre-Sales Applications/Post-Sales Technical Assistance:

800-726-8663

Standard hours: Monday - Friday, 7 a.m. - 7 p.m. CST

Emergency hours: 7 days/week, 24 hours/day

ADTRAN Repair/CAPS

Return for Repair/Upgrade:

(256) 963-8722

Repair and Return Address

Contact CAPS prior to returning equipment to ADTRAN.

ADTRAN, Inc.

CAPS Department

901 Explorer Boulevard

Huntsville, Alabama 35806-2807

61200290L1-1H F-1

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

F-2 61200290L1-1H

Index

Numerics

24 Hour Alarm History

DS2 Statistics menu 5-9

DS3 Statistics menu 5-2

A

acknowledgment messages

All Right 9-3

In Progress 9-3

ACT LED, active cards 2-16

ACT LED, standby cards 2-17

Active Controller menu 3-6

Active state, Card A/Card B 4-5 agent, SNMP 1-3

AIS

24 Hour Alarm History (DS3 statistics) 5-2

Remote status 4-3

State, DS2 4-6

State, DS3 4-2

AIS Carrier Alarms 5-13

AIS Loop Alarms 5-13 alarm events 9-11

Alarm Log 5-14

Alarm menu

DS3 State 4-2

System State 4-4 alarms system 3-34

ALM LED, active cards 2-16

ALM LED, standby cards 2-17

Analog Loopback, remote all T1/E1 6-8

Analog Network loopback test 6-3

Answer on Ring menu 3-20

Auto Save menu 3-38 autonomous messages 9-4 , 9-11

B

backup protection non-redundant power mode 8-1 power supply and source recovery mode

8-2 power supply recovery mode 8-2 battery backup, overview 1-4

Battery Low, Power Supply State 4-4 baud rate, setting 3-20

BERT

CSU Loopback w/ 6-4

Line 6-5

Bipolar Violations 5-13 blue alarm

DS2 State 4-6 network state 4-2

Remote status 4-3 breakout panel overview 1-3

C

CAIS

T1/E1 State 4-6

Card A/Card B

Active state 4-5

Failure 4-5

Not Installed 4-5

Stand By 4-5

Card A/Card B menu 4-5

Card Comm menu 4-5

Card Failure

System State Alarm 4-4

C-Bit Coding Violations (CCV) 5-8

C-Bit Errored Seconds (CES) 5-8

C-bit parity remote loopback 6-4

C-Bit Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) 5-8

Charger Fail, Power Supply State 4-4

61200290L1-1H A-1

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual circuit protection mode 4-5

Clear All Local DS3 Statistics 5-9

Clear All T1/E1 Alarm Counts 5-13 clearing statistics 5-9 codec line/net loopback 6-4

Common Eqpt Fail (NSA) Remote status 4-3

Configuration menus

Network Interface 3-4

Save Configuration 3-44

Utilities 3-38

Connection Timeout menu 3-20

Controller Traps 3-22 craft port pin assignments B-1

CSU Loopback 6-4

CSU Loopback w/BERT 6-4

D

data link state 4-2 data mode 6-9

Date & Time menu 3-33 date, setting 3-33

Dial String menu 3-19

Dialout On Trap menu 3-20 digital line/net loopback 6-3 digital loopback 6-7

DS1 Eqpt Fail (NSA) 4-3

DS1 Eqpt Fail (SA), Remote status 4-3

DS2 Configuration menu 3-7

DS2 State

AIS 4-6

LOF 4-6

OK 4-6

RAI 4-6

DS2 Statistics menu 5-9

DS3 Configuration menu 3-4

DS3 Eqpt Fail (NSA) 4-3

DS3 Eqpt Fail (SA) 4-3

DS3 Loopbacks 6-6

DS3 State

Alarm 4-2

In Test 4-2

Normal 4-2

DS3 State menu 4-1

DS3 Statistics menu 5-2

DSX-1/E1 interfaces, rear panel 2-8

DSX-3 interfaces, rear panel 2-7

E

Equipment Code menu 3-37 error codes 9-17

Error, Power Supply State 4-4 establishing a terminal connection 2-9

Excessive CV, State 4-2

Excessive Switches, System State Alarm 4-4

F

Facility ID menu 3-36

Failure, Card A/Card B 4-5 fan faceplate, overview 1-4

Far End Block Errors (FEBE) 5-9

F-Bit Errors (FBE) 5-8

FEAC 6-4

Frame ID menu 3-36

G

Gateway IP Address menu 3-17

H

Hangup menu 3-21

Host Facility menu 3-37

Host IP Address menu 3-37

HOT, T1/E1 State 4-6

I

Idle

24 Hour Alarm History (DS3 statistics) 5-3

Remote status 4-3

State 4-2

Idle Timeout menu 3-19

In Test, DS3 State 4-2 informational events 9-11

Initializing String menu 3-19

Interval starting at:, Performance Parameters

(DS3) 5-7

IP address trap 3-21

IP Hosts menu 3-33

IP Security menu 3-33

L

LAIS

T1/E1 State 4-6

LAN pin assignments B-1

LAN port, MX2800 2-7

Last Modem Response menu 3-21

A-2 61200290L1-1H

Index

LEDs

ACT, active cards 2-16

ACT, standby cards 2-17

ALM, active cards 2-16

ALM, standby cards 2-17

NET, active cards 2-16

NET, standby cards 2-17

PRF, active cards 2-16

PRF, standby cards 2-17

Line BERT 6-5

Line Coding menus, T1/E1 3-10

Line Coding Violation (LCV) 5-8

Line Coding Violations (LCV) 5-8

Line Errored Seconds (LES) 5-8

Line Length menu long 3-4 short 3-4

Line Length menus, T1/E1 3-11

Line Loopback 6-7

Local IP Address menu 3-17

Location ID menu 3-36

LOF

24 Hour Alarm History (DS3 statistics) 5-2

DS2 State 4-6

State 4-2 logging out 2-15 long line length 3-4 loopback

CSU 6-4

CSU with BERT 6-4

DS2 6-9

DS3 6-6

T1/E1 6-2

Loopback menu

Analog Network 6-3

Codec Line/Net 6-4

CSU Loopback 6-4

CSU Loopback w/BERT 6-4

Digital Line/Net 6-3

Digital Loopback 6-7

DS2 Loopback 6-9

DS2 Network 6-9

DS3 Loopbacks 6-6

Line BERT 6-5

Line Loopback 6-7

Metallic Loopback 6-8

Remote all T1/E1 6-8

Remote Loopback 6-4 , 6-8

T1/E1 Loopbacks 6-2

Tributary 6-2

Loopback menu, network configuration 3-7

LOS

24 Hour Alarm History (DS3 statistics)

5-2

Remote status 4-3

State 4-2

T1/E1 State 4-6

Loss of Signal Alarms 5-13

M

management station addresses 3-33

Maximum Redial Attempts menu 3-19 menu navigation 2-10 metallic loopback 6-8

MIB, SNMP 1-3

Miscellaneous menu 3-33

Miscellaneous menus, network configuration

3-7

Modem Mode menu 3-20

Modem port, MX2800 2-7

Multiple DS1 LOS, Remote status 4-3

MX2800 options 1-3

MX2800 Product Overview 1-1

N

navigating the menus 2-10

NET LED, active cards 2-16

NET LED, standby cards 2-17

Network Interface menus 3-4 network manager, SNMP 1-2 network protection mode 4-5 none, Protection mode 4-5 non-redundant power mode 8-1

Normal

Power Supply State 4-4

Remote status 4-3

Not Installed, Card A/Card B 4-5

O

OK

DS2 State 4-6

T1/E1 state 4-6

OOF

Remote status 4-3 options for the MX2800 1-3 output response messages 9-4

P

Pause Between Calls menu 3-20

61200290L1-1H A-3

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

P-Bit Coding Violations (PCV) 5-8

P-Bit Errored Seconds (CES) 5-8

P-Bit Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) 5-8

Performance Parameters (DS3)

C-Bit Coding Violations (CCV) 5-8

C-Bit Errored Seconds (CES) 5-8

C-Bit Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) 5-

8

Clear All Local DS3 Statistics 5-9

Far End Block Errors (FEBE) 5-9

F-Bit Errors (FBE) 5-8

Interval starting at: 5-7

Line Coding Violation (LCV) 5-8

Line Coding Violations (LCV) 5-8

Line Errored Seconds (LES) 5-8

P-Bit Coding Violations (PCV) 5-8

P-Bit Errored Seconds (CES) 5-8

P-Bit Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) 5-8

Refresh All Remote Statistics 5-9

Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS)

5-8

Unavailable Seconds (UAS) 5-8

Performance Parameters menu (DS2) 5-11

Performance Parameters menu (DS3) 5-4 phone numbers primary 3-19 secondary 3-19 pin assignments auxiliary port B-1 control connector B-1 craft port B-1

LAN B-1

LAN port B-1 pinouts A-1 , B-1 power connection, rear panel 2-8

Power Fail, Power Supply State 4-4 power loss recovery non-redundant power mode 8-1 power supply and source recovery mode 8-

2 power supply recovery mode 8-2

Power Low

Power Supply State 4-4 power supply and source recovery mode 8-2 power supply recovery mode 8-2

Power Supply State

Battery Low 4-4

Charger Fail 4-4

Error 4-4

Normal 4-4

Power Fail 4-4

Power Low 4-4

Temp Critical 4-4

Temp High 4-4

Power Supply State menu 4-4 power up

AC version 2-2

DC version 2-2

PRF LED, active cards 2-16

PRF LED, standby cards 2-17

Privilege Level 2-15

Protection Configuration menus 3-6

Protection menu 4-5 protection mode

Circuit 4-5 circuit failure recovery 7-2 , 7-3

Network 4-5 network failure recovery 7-3

None 4-5 non-redundant 7-1

Protection Threshold 3-14

R

RAI

24 Hour Alarm History (DS3 statistics) 5-2

DS2 State 4-6

Remote status 4-3

State 4-2

Read Community Name 3-24

Read Community Name address 3-21 receiving inspection 2-1 redundancy circuit and network failure recovery mode

7-3 circuit failure recovery mode 7-2 non-redundant mode 7-1

Refresh All Remote Statistics 5-9 refreshing remote statistics 5-9 remote loopback

DS3 6-8

T1/E1 6-4

Remote Loopbacks menu 3-5

Remote menu 4-3

Remote state unknown 4-3

A-4 61200290L1-1H

Remote status

AIS 4-3

Common Eqpt Fail (NSA) 4-3

DS1 Eqpt Fail (NSA) 4-3

DS1 Eqpt Fail (SA) 4-3

DS3 Eqpt Fail (NSA) 4-3

DS3 Eqpt Fail (SA) 4-3

Idle 4-3

LOF 4-3

LOS 4-3

Multiple DS1 LOS 4-3

Normal 4-3

RAI 4-3

Single DS1 LOS 4-3 resetting the system 3-43

Rx Framing menu 4-1

S

Save Configuration and Alarm Log menu 3-44 setting the baud rate 3-20 setting the date 3-33 setting the time 3-33

Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS) 5-8

Severity Level menu 3-37 shipping, contents 2-1 short line length 3-4

Single DS1 LOS, Remote status 4-3

SNMP Management Options 3-21

SNMP State 3-21

SNMP State menu 3-21

SNMP, overview 1-2 specifications, MX2800 C-1

Stand By, Card A/Card B 4-5

State menu (DS3 State) 4-2

State menus, T1/E1 3-9

Statistics menu

24 Hour Alarm History (DS2) 5-9

24 Hour Alarm History (DS3) 5-2

Clear All T1/E1 Alarm Counts 5-13

DS2 Statistics 5-9

DS3 Statistics 5-2

Performance Parameters (DS3) 5-4

T1/E1 Statistics 5-13

Statistics menus 5-1

Status menu

Alarm (DS3 State) 4-2

Alarm (System State) 4-4

Card A/Card B 4-5

Card Comm 4-5

DS2 State 4-6

DS3 State 4-1

Power Supply State 4-4

Protection 4-5

Remote 4-3

Rx Framing 4-1

State 4-2

System State 4-4

Subnet Mask menu 3-17

Supply Failure, System State Alarm 4-4

Switched, System State Alarm 4-4

Syslog Setup menu 3-37 system alarms 3-34

System Name 3-25 system reset 3-43

System Security 3-26

System Security menu 3-26

System State Alarm

Card Failure 4-4

Excessive Switches 4-4

Supply Failure 4-4

Switched 4-4

System State menu 4-4

T

T1/E1 Line Length menu 3-11

T1/E1 menus

Line Coding 3-10

State 3-9

T1/E1 State

CAIS 4-6

HOT 4-6

LAIS 4-6

LOS 4-6

OK 4-6

TST 4-6

XCV 4-6

T1/E1 Statistics menu 5-13

Telnet, overview 1-3

Temp Critical, Power Supply State 4-4

Temp High, Power Supply State 4-4 terminal connection, establishing 2-9 time, setting 3-33

Index

61200290L1-1H A-5

MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual

TL1 alarm events 9-11 autonomous messages 9-11 commands 9-5

Editing 9-17 error codes 9-17 informational events 9-11 messages 9-3 responses 9-3

TLOS, State 4-2

Transmission menu 3-37

Trap Community Name 3-25

Trap Generation menu 3-21

Trap IP Addresses menu 3-21 traps controller 3-22 for calls between primary and secondary numbers 3-19 for redialing 3-19

Tributary loopback 6-2

TST, T1/E1 State 4-6

U

Unavailable Seconds (UAS) 5-8

Unit ID Code menu 3-36

Unknown, Remote state 4-3

Utilities menu 3-38

V

viewing statistical information 5-1

W

Write Community Name 3-25

X

XCV

T1/E1 State 4-6

A-6 61200290L1-1H

This page is intentionally blank.

Index

61200290L1-1H A-7

®

Carrier Networks Division

901 Explorer Blvd.

Huntsville, AL 35806

advertisement

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents